Convort 2

FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT
REPORT
OF
The UPGRADATION & EXPANSION OF CETP FROM

600 KLD to 1100 KLD CAPACITY AND
IMPLEMENTATION OF SECURED LANDFILL (SLF) AT
IGC, LASSIPORA DISTRICT-PULWAMA, J&K BY M/s J&K
SIDCO.
APPLICANT
JAMMU & KASHMIR STATE INDUSTRIAL DEVELOPMENT

CORPORATION LIMITED (J&K SIDCO)
Prepared By
CONSULTANT
M/s IDMA LABORATORIES LIMITED
(Accredited Environmental Consultant Organization by QCI/NABET at Sr. No. 10 in the list of

accredited consultant Organizations /Rev. 71/ November 12, 2018 on website www.qcin.org ),
Address: 391, Industrial Area, Phase-1, Panchkula-134113,
Phone No.-0172-5064827, Email: testing@idmagroup.co.in
List of contents
Chapter-1: Introduction Page no
1.1 Introduction 1
1.2 About J&K SIDCO 2
1.3 Need of the project – 4
1.4 Project location 7
1.5 Scope of the EIA 10
1.6 Structure of Environmental Impact Assessment Report 11
1.7 Analysis of alternatives 11
Chapter-2: Project Description
2.1 Introduction 13
2.2 Justification for the project 13
2.3 Project cost 15
2.4 Location of project 37
2.5 Size & magnitude of the project 39
2.6 Land use plan 39
2.6.1 Geographical Features & Topography 41
2.6.2 Climate & Climatic Zones 41
2.7 Details of Tanneries at IGC 43
2.8 Basic data of CETP 44
2.8.1 Effluent inflow details 45
2.8.2 Operational parameters of CETP 46
2.9 Project requirements 46
2.10 Design basis for the project 121
2.11 Hazardous sludge disposal 121
2.11.1 Design of Landfill 123
2.12 Infrastructure facilities 129
2.13 Alternative power supply arrangement 131
Chapter-3: Description of Environment
3.1 Introduction 135
3.2 Study area and period 135
3.3 Baseline monitoring of environmental component 135
3.3.1 Meteorology 135
i
3.3.2 Air environment 137
3.3.2.1 Monitoring Schedule 138
3.3.2.2 Methods of sampling and analysis 138
3.3.2.3 Selection of monitoring locations 139
3.3.2.4 Results & discussions 141
3.3.3 Noise levels 141
3.3.4 Water environment 146
3.3.5 Land environment 156
3.3.6 Biological environment 167
Chapter-4: Anticipated environmental impacts and mitigation measures
4.1 Air environment 196
4.2 Noise environment 197
4.3 Water environment 199
4.4 Land environment 201
4.5 Ecological environment 203
4.6 Socio economic environment 204
4.7 Solid waste management 205
Chapter-5 : Alternative Sites
5.2 Selection of sites for detailed investigation 217
5.3 Building Materials 220
5.3.1 Wall 220
5.3.2 Roof 220
5.3.3 Roads and Open Spaces 221
5.4 Energy Conservation 221
Chapter-6 : Environmental monitoring programme
6.2 Areas of concern 224
6.3 Performance indicators 225
6.4 Cost estimate 227
6.5 Environmental policy 227
6.6 Formation of environmental management cell (EMC) 228
Chapter-7: Additional studies
7.1 Public consultation 230
7.2 Activities at CETP 230
7.3 Instruments & equipment handling 230
7.4 Types of hazards in CETP 231
7.5 Fire fighting system 234
7.6 Risk and hazard assessment 234
7.7 Health & safety measures 238
7.8 Disaster management plan 239
Chapter-8 : Project benefits
8.1 Benefit of CETP 250
8.2 Employment potential 252
8.3 Economic benefits 253
8.4 Environmental cost & benefit analysis 253
8.5 Corporate social responsibility 253
Chapter-9 : Cost-Benefit Analysis
9.0 General 255
Chapter-10 : Environmental Management plan
10.2 Objectives & scope 256
10.3 The objectives of the environment management plan 257
10.4 Environmental management cell 258
10.5 Management & maintenance of conveyance system 259
10.6 Management of water environment at CETP 260
10.7 Monitoring of member industrial units for their responsibilities 260
10.8 Green belt development 260
10.9 Odour management plan 261
10.10 Conclusion 263
Chapter-11 : Summary & Conclusion 264-276
Chapter-12 : Disclosure of Consultants 277-279
iii
LIST OF TABLES
Table no. Title Page no.

1.1 Details of Tanneries at IGC, Lassipora 5
2.1 Availability of hides & skins at J&K 14
2.2 Area statement for Lassipora 40
2.3 Category of industrial plots 40
2.4 Details of Tanneries in IGC 43
2.5 Basic data on IGC-CETP 44
2.6 Characteristics of raw effluent, equalized effluent, Primary effluent 46
and secondary treated effluent
2.7 Technical specifications of DG set engines 77
2.8 Technical specifications of DG set alternators 77
2.9 Preferred makes of DG components 77
2.10 Prescribed standards for treated effluent from IGC CETP 80
2.11 Minimum design criteria for gravity conveyance system 82
2.12 Design basis of CETP 120
2.13 Characteristics of CETP Sludge at IGC 122
2.14 Soil Conditions at IGC 124
2.15 Quality of treated waste water 133
3.1 Summarized meteorological data for the monitoring period (March to 136
May 2018)
3.2 Location of the ambient air quality monitoring stations 138
3.3 Techniques used for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring 138
3.4 Results of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring 141
3.5 Location of Ambient Noise Quality Monitoring Stations 142

3.6 Ambient Quality Standards in respect of Noise 145
3.7 Results for Noise Quality Monitoring 145
3.8 Water Quality Criteria as per Central Pollution Control Board 147
3.9 Location of Water Sampling Sites 148
3.10 Results of Ground water quality at the monitoring locations 152
3.11 Results Of Surface Water Quality At The Monitoring Locations 154
3.12 Area under different Land Use/Land Cover Classes in the study Area 158
3.13 Area under different Land Use/Land Cover Classes in the IGC 159
3.14 Frequency and Methodology for Soil Sampling & Monitoring 163
3.15 Soil Sample Collection Points 163
3.16 Physiochemical characteristics of soil 165
3.17 Standards for soil classification 166
3.18 The first 10 large families with their number of species found in and 175
around Lassipora IGC
3.19 The First Five Large Genera In The Impact Zone Of Lassipora IGC 175
3.20 List of medicinal plant species with their medicinal importance from 180
the Lassipora Direct and indirect impact zone
3.21 Threatened plant species collected from the Direct and indirect 182
impact zone of Lassipora IGC.
3.22 Distribution Pattern Of Phytoplankton At Different Study Sites 183
3.23 Terrestrial Macro-Invertebrate fauna recorded in and around 184
Lassipora IGC, Pulwama
3.24 Lower vertebrates found in and around Lassipora IGC 185
3.25 A List Of Birds Observed In The Buffer Zone Of Proposed Project 186
3.26 The Contribution Of Various Families To The Avifauna Of The Locality 187
3.27 Various macro-invertebrate species present in the buffer zone of 188
present project
3.28 Percent Composition Of Fishes Found In The Project Area 190
4.1 Potential Impacts and Mitigation Measures during Construction Phase 207
4.2 Potential Impacts and Mitigation Measures during Operation Phase 209
6.1 Summary of Environmental Monitoring Programme for 226
Implementation during Project Construction Phase
6.2 Summary of cost of the Environmental Monitoring Programme for 227
Implementation during Project Operation Phase
List of Figures
Figure no. Title Page no.
1.1 Map showing location of IGC Lassipora in Pulwama district of Jammu &
9
Kashmir
2.1 Site Photographs 600 KLD CETP Under Operation 36
2.2 Proposed Expansion and up gradation to 1100 KLD 36
2.3 Map showing location of IGC Lassipora in Pulwama district of Jammu 38
& Kashmir
2.4 Location of IGC Lassipora on Google Earth image 39
2.5 Layout of Leather Park at Lassipora IGC 42
2.6 Location of CETP 44
2.7 Existing Scheme of Lassipora IGC CETP 45
2.8 The scheme of treatment proposed for the new CETP module 120
2.9 Solar irradiance in Lassipora region 132
3.1 Wind Rose Diagram 137
3.2 Location of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations 140
3.3 Location of Noise Quality Monitoring Stations 144
3.4 Location of Water Quality Monitoring Station 150
3.5 Area under different Land Use/Land Cover Classes in the study Area 159
3.6 Detailed Land Use/Land Cover of IGC, Lassipora 160
3.7 Land Use Map of Project Site 161
3.8 Seismic Zone Map 162
3.9 Location of Soil Sampling Sites 164
3.10 Location Map of IGC Lassipora 169
3.11 Location of the Present Project 170
5.1 Site Suitability Approach for candidate sites 215
6.1 Organizational Chart of CETP Indicating Environmental Management 229
Cell
EIA for the upgradation and expansion of CETP of 600 KLD to 1100 KLD capacity and implementation of SLF at
Industrial Growth Centre, Lassipora, District-Pulwama, J&K by M/s J& K SIDCO.
CHAPTER -1
INTRODUCTION
Environment Impact Assessment (EIA) is a process of identifying, predicting, evaluating and
mitigating the biophysical, social and other relevant effects of development proposals prior to
major decisions being taken and commitments made. These studies integrate the developmental
activities in to the process of decision-making. EIA is formalized as a regulatory tool in more
than 100 countries for effective integration of environmental concerns in the economic
development process.
In order to minimize environmental pollution due to small and medium scale industries, cleaner
production technologies and formation of waste minimization circles are being encouraged in
India. Besides, collective treatment at a centralized facility known as CETP is considered as a
viable treatment solution, to overcome the constraints associated with effluent treatment in
small to medium enterprises.
The concept of CETP was adopted as a way to achieve end-of-the-pipe treatment of combined
wastewater to avail the benefit of scale of operation. In addition, the CETP also facilitates in
reduction of number of discharge points in an industrial estate for better enforcement and also to
make available the skilled manpower for proper treatment of effluent.
1.1 Introduction
Lassipora is a village in Panjran panchayat of Pulwama district in the Indian administered state
Jammu & Kashmir. Agriculture is the main profession of this village.
The Industrial Growth Centre, Lassipora is situated in the Village Lassipora which resides in the
Panjran panchayat of Pulwama district. After the establishment of the Leather Cluster in
Lassipora, some tanneries have come up there to process raw hides and skins into wet blue
leather for sale in different parts of the country. A part of the park, 50 acres, is earmarked
exclusively for leather industry and there are 13 units registered as tanneries with SIDCO. An
association of these tanners has been created to further help their development. Of these 13
registered units with SIDCO, three are operational, one more is ready to start production, and
three more have decided to go ahead with establishing new tanneries and two old units, now
EIA Consultant – M/s Idma Laboratories Limited Page 1

inoperative, have plans for revival. Following the keenness shown by the government and the
recent developments, there is considerable optimism amongst the tanners of the state.
At present, an estimated 30,000 hides and 1, 20,000 skins are reportedly processed by the
operational tanneries in Lassipora. All these produces only up to wet blue stage and sell these at
different parts of the country, including in Tamil Nadu. Rest of the available raw material is sold
as such outside the state. The intention of the tanners now is to convert all available raw material
into wet blue and later finished leather. Some tanners have been in discussion with their buyers
regarding the possibility of establishing value added product units for shoe uppers, garments etc.
As per the EIA notification dated 14 th September 2006 as amended till date, the proposed project
falls under the Category 7 (h) i.e. Common Effluent treatment plants (CETP’s). The project shall be
treated as Category “B”.
1.2 About J&K SIDCO

Jammu & Kashmir State Industrial Development Corporation (J&K SIDCO) was established in
1967 to act as a catalyst to inspire and accelerate the industrial development in the State. The
promotion of industries is by way of identification and formulation of techno economically viable
projects and tie up of appropriate technologies and collaborations for the requirement of industries.
J&K SIDCO (Jammu & Kashmir State Industrial Development Corporation) is the nodal agency for
promotion & development of medium and large scale Industries in the state. Since its inception J&K
SIDCO has acted as a prime mover in the State for promotion of Industrial ventures and thus is
playing the role of "Institutional Entrepreneur". It have been entrusted with the following important
assignments of development of industry in the state-
To conduct work for promotion of industry in J&K state by conducting seminars, helping
entrepreneurs in obtaining LOI., etc.
Identification of technically feasible and financially viable projects for the State of Jammu &
Kashmir.
Development of infrastructural facilities for medium/large scale industrial projects.

Grant of financial assistance to industrial projects having investment up to 300 lacs and
participation in the equity of selected joint/assisted sector projects.
J&K SIDCO has established 7 industrial estates to provide infrastructure facilities at identified
locations suitable for industrial development throughout the length and breadth of the State.
Within each Estate developed land is available at a much subsidized rate.
Industrial Growth Centers and Export Promotion Industrial Parks are being set up
in both Jammu region and Kashmir valley separately, by way of acquiring land, constructing
internal roads, effluent disposal facilities, providing water and power in the industrial estate.
Amenities like fire stations, restaurant, bank, post offices, housing, schools, hospitals, shopping
centre’s, convention centre’s etc. are the main Infrastructure facilities. J & K SIDCO
is also developing product specific industrial estates to fulfill the functional needs of certain
industries like Textiles, Electronics and Software development etc.
The Corporation also offers a variety of financial assistance for setting up new units and
for expansion/ diversification/ modernization of existing projects. For medium and large
scale projects including tourism related and micro hydel power projects, the assistance can
be availed in consortium arrangement with central and state level institutions or banks.
J&K SIDCO has also promoted projects in joint and assisted sectors.
J&K SIDCO 's scale of operations cover fields as diverse as engineering, electronics,
software dev. pharmaceuticals, hotels, textiles, and power generating projects etc.
1.3 Need of the Project
Leather and allied industry is an important industrial sector in India. With an annual turnover
of over US$ 12.50 billion, the export of leather and leather products increased during the past
decades and touched US$ 6.5 billion during 2014-15, recording a cumulative annual growth
rate of about 13.10% (5 years).
The Indian Leather industry has tremendous potential as India is endowed with 21% of world
cattle & buffalo and 11% of world goat & sheep population. Added to this are the strengths of
skilled manpower, innovative technology, increasing industry compliance to international
environmental standards, and the dedicated support of the allied industries. The leather
industry is an employment intensive sector, providing job to about 2.5 million people, mostly
from the weaker sections of the society. Women employment is predominant in leather
products sector with about 30% share.
Though not one among prominent leather producing States, Jammu & Kashmir too have a
tanning industry in the State. Lassipora, in Pulwama district of Jammu & Kashmir, houses an
Industrial Growth Centre, one of the large industrial clusters of the State. The Industrial
Growth Centre (IGC), situated at about 9 km from Pulwama town and about 34 km from the
Capital city Srinagar, established by the J&K State Industrial Development Corporation
(SIDCO), houses a variety of industries. Tanneries, all currently processing raw hides/skins to
wet blue leather, form an important part of the Centre. There are 13 tanneries registered with
J&K SIDCO.
A common effluent treatment plant (CETP) has been established at IGC, Lassipora for
treatment of effluents, mainly from the tanneries but it also treats other effluents such
as trade wastewater from Dairy, bone crushing units etc. too. The designed capacity of
the CETP was 600 m3/d, 40-50% being the present capacity utilization. Inaugurated in 2011,
the CETP is being managed by a company formed by the beneficiary members
and Mr. Sameer Azad, a leading tanner in the Cluster, is the Managing Director of this
company.
The J & K SIDCO is in the process of implementing a common facility center in IGC.
Simultaneous with the establishment of CFC, the need to upgrade the CETP too was felt and
inspection of the present facilities was carried out. It was observed that when all the tanneries
currently under implementation start operating, more treatment capacity in the CETP would
be needed. Further, the effluent volume from the existing units too would increase significantly
when the wet finishing operations, part of the CFC operations, are taken up. It is estimated
that an additional module of CETP of 500m 3/d may be required for this purpose, increasing the
total treatment capacity to 1100 m3/d.
Apart from the above measures, there is a need to provide a Secured Landfill (SLF) for disposal
of dewatered sludge from the cluster. This is a mandatory requirement as the sludge from
tannery waste treatment plants has been classified as hazardous and therefore it has to be
disposed off only in a properly designed safe and secured landfill. Considering the likely
generation of sludge from the CETP for the present and the future activities, a volume of about
15,000 m3 may be needed for the next 15 years and an SLF for this capacity, with provisions
for replication as and when needed, has been recommended.
The upgraded CETP, complete with landfill will ensure that no ill effects to environment shall
occur due to the industrial activity and this unit shall be a model for the entire state.
The installation of a proper effluent treatment facility, complete with sludge disposal is vital
for the growth of the industry, development of the entire region, same time preserving the
serene environment of the Lassipora region.
Table 1.1 – Details of Tanneries at IGC, Lassipora
# Name of the unit Land Current Status Personnel

allotted level of employed
Kanals production
1 M/s B.A. Rawenda & Bros 14.00 1000/day Operational 22
2 M/s Ream Tannery, Sameer 11.00 550/day Operational 31
3 M/s Universal Tanning 8.00 1000/day Operational 20
Company
4 M/s Golden Tanners 2.00 400/day Ready to start 35
5 M/s Sun Rise Estate 3.00 1000/day Registered 24
yet to start.
6 M/s Shahara International 4.00 - -do- 24
7 M/s Mir Leather Tannery 3.00 - -do- 19

8 M/s Baba Tanneries 4.00 - -do- 24
9 M/s Kawa Tanneries 7.00 - Building 25
ready
10 M/s Sheikh Tanneries 7.00 - -do- 25
11 M/s Darial Leather 8.00 - -do- 31
12 M/s Tanwell Tanneries (p) 17.00 - Completed, 0
Ltd. not yet
operational
13 M/s Tan-tek Tanneries (p) 13.00 - -do- 0
Ltd.
Total 101.00 280
Source: DPR
The common effluent treatment plant (CETP) installed at IGC Lassipora, treats effluents from
tanneries and some other industries in the Cluster. This was created as a part of the IGC by J&K
State Industrial Development Corporation.
The present effluent inflow into the CETP from the tanneries is about 180 m 3/d.It has been
reported that apart from the tanneries, three dairy units and one bone crushing unit too are
discharging their effluents to the CETP. The volume of dairy effluent treated in the CETP is 110
m3/d and the bone crushing units, about 9 m3/d. The total inflow to the CETP is thus
estimated as 300 m3/d.
At present, the CETP appears to be fully operational and its components appear generally in
good working condition. Understandably, the biological treatment was not operating properly
due to the low temperature and the treated effluent was turbid. By a visual inspection it
appeared likely to be high in organics. Apart from the above, the CETP needs some more
improvement to ensure that it would treat the effluent efficiently to reach prescribed
standards for surface disposal.
Given the fact that the CETP treats effluents other tannery effluent too, when the 2-3 tanneries
currently getting ready to start its operations start working, the CETP may get effluent flow
equivalent to its designed capacity and when all the proposed tanneries are fully functional,
the capacity may not be adequate.
Further, when the CFC starts its operation, the tanneries would need to start wet finishing
operations and this would increase the water consumption and effluent generation
significantly, almost double of the current volume. The CFC too may generate a small quantity
of effluent, mostly squeezed out water from the wet leather.
Considering all the scenarios, it has been proposed to enhance the capacity of the CETP with
the addition of another module of CETP with 500 m3/d capacity.
At present, the dried and semi-dried sludge from the CETP is dumped in open land adjacent to
the CETP. Apart from creating an unsightly appearance, this is also against law as it has to be
disposed off only in a safe and secured landfill. Further, as per the requirements of MoEF & CC,
the sludge from tannery ETPs need to be considered hazardous and hence should be disposed
off only in Secured Landfills (SLF) conforming to the guidelines of CPCB/MoEF & CC.
Considering the final capacity of the CETP and the likely generation for the next 15 years, a
scientifically designed SLF needs to be set up. The layout of the unit need to be made in such a
way that as and when additional units are required, the same can be constructed adjacent to
the first SLF module.
1.4 Project Location

Location - Industrial Growth Centre (IGC)
Village - Lassipora
District - Pulwama
State - Jammu & Kashmir
Site Coordinates - 330 47’ 17.59’’ N
740 56’ 55.16’’ E

Approach to the - National Highway -1A (NH-1A) is located at a distance
site of 14 km in East direction.
Nearest railway station is Shri Mata Vaishno Devi

Katra railway station is situated at a distance of 93.6
km in South direction.
Srinagar International Airport is situated at a distance

of 25.9 km in NW direction.
Distance from - Nearest town is Pulwama located at a distance of 9.18

nearest waterways km in NNW direction.
Seismicity - The project is located in seismic zone V.

There are incidences of earthquake in Jammu &
Kashmir. No significant damage is reported at site.
Figure 1.1 -Map showing location of IGC Lassipora in Pulwama district of Jammu & Kashmir
1.5 Scope of the EIA
The study envisages characterization of the existing status of physical environment such as air,
water, soil, land use, meteorology, socio economic, heritage etc. as well as biological environment
such as flora and fauna of the study area of 10 km radius and quantifying impacts of the
environmental parameters on Environment. Based on the baseline data, EIA evaluates the
proposed control measures by the project proponent, prepares an environmental management
plan, outlining additional proposed activities, and delineates the requirements of environmental
monitoring program. EIA-EMP report covers the following aspects –
 Evaluation of present environmental factors through analysis of generated and
collected baseline data for one complete non-monsoon season (3 months)
 Assess the probable impact on the environmental factors due to implementation of the
project with respect to existing scenario.
 Analyze the predicted impact with respect to the regulatory environmental standards.
 The baseline data has been collected for the following environmental components,
during 15th March to 15th June 2018.
 Air Quality
 Meteorology
 Noise Environment
 Water Use & Quality
 Soil Quality
 Demographic & Socio-economic census 2011
 Ecology & Biodiversity
Baseline data on parameters of the above mentioned aspects over a season provides means for
identifying possible impact-positive as well as adverse. An environmental impact assessment
and environmental management plan comprising an overall assessment of the impact due to
project activity over baseline condition of the existing environment and a mitigating action
plan to counter the adverse impact as defined. An environmental monitoring program is also
prepared to provide scientific support to future actions of environmental protection.
1.6 Structure of the EIA Report –
The entire EIA report has been prepared in line with generic structure of EIA document as per
EIA notification 2006:
1. Introduction
2. Project Description
3. Description of the Environment
4. Anticipated Environmental Impact & Mitigation Measures
5. Analysis of Alternatives (Technology & Site)
6. Environmental Monitoring Program
7. Additional Studies
8. Project Benefits
9. Cost-Benefit Analysis
10. Environmental Management Plan
11. Summary & Conclusion
12. Disclosure of Consultant engaged
1.7 Analysis of alternatives
The analysis of alternative is the process of comparing potential impacts and mitigation
options of a series of alternative location, technologies, operation to identify optimal
alternatives that meets national legislation. These alternatives can include variations in layout,
alternative engineering process, routing, linear facilities and screening of material suppliers to
select those with appropriate environmental and risk management system.
The proposed site of CETP is selected as per the guidelines of MoEF & CC. The treatment
technology and treatment Scheme for the effluents from units located in industrial area of
Village – Lassipora; District - Pulwama has been finalized on the basis of detailed data
collection on quality and quantity of the effluent produced by the industries & CETP has been
setup.
Analysis has been carried out for the selected site only.
The salient features are given below –
Site Selection –
The following guiding factors have been considered while selecting the site for the
establishment of CETP –
1. The land falls in the Industrial Zone and the proposed project site is earmarked for CETP.
2. Land -Acquisition has already been done by J&K SIDCO.
3. The transport of effluent is through the dedicated pipeline system.
4. All infrastructures are easily available.
EIA for the upgradation and expansion of CETP of 600 KLD to 1100 KLD capacity and implementation of
SLF at Industrial Growth Centre, Lassipora, District-Pulwama, J&K by M/s J& K SIDCO.
CHAPTER -2
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
2.1 Introduction
Jammu & Kashmir State Industrial Development Corporation (J&K SIDCO) is coming
up with the project for the upgradation and expansion of CETP of 600 KLD to 1100 KLD
capacity and implementation of SLF at Industrial Growth Centre, Lassipora, District-
Pulwama, J&K by M/s J& K SIDCO.
As per the EIA Notification dated 14 th September 2006, as amended till date, the proposed
project falls under the Project Activity: 7 (h) – Common Effluent Treatment Plants (CETP).
The project shall be treated as Category “B”.
2.2 Justification for the Project

In order to tackle the problem of industrial backwardness of J&K State and also mitigate
infrastructural problems faced by the State in attracting industrial investment of significant
magnitude, two growth centre’s in the state of Jammu & Kashmir (one in Jammu province
and other in Kashmir province) were planned. The work on Growth Centre project at
Lassipora has been commenced by J&K SIDCO which is the nodal agency in this regard.
Because of the favorable factors such as tax holiday for the industrial units in J&K State,
relatively very cheap power tariff as also the demand for different type of goods and
services and there being the availability of exploitable resources, the industrial activity is
expected to pick up in the state based on the above factors as also considering the past
trend an indicative list of industries expected to come up at Growth Centre Lassipora.
Major benefits from the project:
 With the upgradation, the CETP can cater to the requirements of all tanneries and
the Common Facility Centre, achieving full production.
 The upgradation will reduce the operation cost of the CETP ensuring its sustainability.
 The upgradation will ensure proper, safe and scientific disposal of about 2000 t/year
sludge from the CETP and member units.

 The project is expected to provide direct new employment of about 300 personnel
and indirect employment to about 1000 personnel.
Leather industry in J &K
Generation of raw hides and skins is quite considerable in the state of J&K as the
consumption of meat is quite high and wide spread. Though no reliable data is available,
based on an estimate provided by the Central Leather Research Institute, Chennai, the
current availability of hides and skins in the state of J&K is at table 1.
Table 2.1: Current availability of hides and skins in the state of J&K
Estimated Livestock Population and Production of Hides & Skins in Jammu and Kashmir
2015 (Figure in Lakhs)
Livestock Livestock Slaughter Fallen Total

Species Population
Cattle 31.28 (28.00) 8.31 1.44 9.75
Buffalo 6.42 (7.40) 1.00 0.40 1.40
Goat 21.07 (20.20) 13.69 0.69 14.38
Sheep 35.39 (33.80) 21.23 0.84 22.07
Note: Figures in bracket represent actual livestock census of 2012, published by

Department of Animal Husbandry & Dairying Ministry of Agriculture, Govt. of India.
Based on the livestock trends in Jammu & Kashmir, estimation made for 2015.The
slaughter and fallen (recovered) rates of previous survey conducted by CSIR-CLRI in
Jammu and Kashmir are applied to arrive the estimation of hides and skins available for
Jammu and Kashmir in 2015.
In the past two major tanneries existed in the state, one at Shalteng near Srinagar and
another at Muthi, near Jammu. However, for various reasons, both these units were closed
down and for the past many years’ raw material from the state has been exported as such
without any value addition. After establishment of the Leather Cluster in Lassipora, some
tanneries have come up there to process raw hides and skins into wet blue leather for sale
in different parts of the country. A part of the park, 50 acres, is earmarked exclusively for
leather industry and there are 13 units registered as tanneries with SIDCO. An association
of these tanners has been created to further help their development. Of these 13 registered
units with SIDCO, three are operational, one more is ready to start production, three more
have decided to go ahead with establishing new tanneries and two old units, now
inoperative, have plans for revival. Following the keenness shown by the government and
the recent developments, there is considerable optimism amongst the tanners of the state.
At present, an estimated 30,000 hides and 1,20,000 skins are reportedly processed by the
operational tanneries in Lassipora. All these produces only upto wet blue stage and sell
these at different parts of the country, including in Tamil Nadu. Rest of the available raw
material is sold as such outside the state. The intention of the tanners now is to convert all
available raw material into wet blue and later finished leather. Some tanners have been in
discussion with their buyers regarding the possibility of establishing value added product
units for shoe uppers, garments etc. A list of entrepreneurs registered with the SIDCO at
Lassipora, extent of land allotted to them, date of allotment of land, their current status and
the number of persons employed in these units, as provided by the Association of Tanners
of Lassipora, is given at page no. 48 in this Chapter.
2.3 Project Cost
Total Project Cost : 18, 98, 82,957.17

The overall cost of CETP and landfill for module I & II are as follows:
S.No Component Cost
I Pre-Treatment Units
i. New Bar Screen 3,18,500.00
ii. Raw Effluent flow meter 19,79,900.00
A. Collection & Conveyance System

1 Modifications in collection system 26,28,000.00
B. CETP-Upgradation
3 Mechanical Bar Screen 21,90,215.00
4 Submersible mixer in eq. tank with distribution chamber 13,81,977.00
5 Poly Dosing System 2,98,720.40
6 Primary Clariflocculator in SS. 9,61,000.00
7 Modification in aeration tank’s mixing system 37,79,322.00
8 Tertiary treatment system 57,65,550.00
9 Effluent & Sludge Storage Tank’s Instrumentation 12,25,750.00
C. CETP- Additional Capacity
11 New Equalization tank with mechanism 43,07,166.00
12 Dosing System 41,48,181.60
13 Primary Clarifier 19,31,712.20
14 Aeration System for new module 2,37,18,370.10
15 Secondary Clarifier 54,08,038.00
16 Effluent & Sludge Collection Tank –II with Instrumentation 47,69,123.95
17 New Filter Press unit -2 Nos with Sludge Conditioning, common 1,44,30,410.00
Filter Press building
D. Others
18 D.G Sets 18,31,576.00
19 Additional Laboratory instrument. 7,05,655.00
20 MCC & Control Room 30,57,369.00
E Secured Landfill
21 New SLF* 3,25,04,569.00

F Alternate Power System
22 0.5MW Solar power System 3,23,09,127.17
23 Electrical work for Both module 1,05,88,550.00
Total 16,02,38,782.42
Administration& Technical Charges (3%+ 2%) 80,11,939.12
J & K State Entry Tax and other escalations @13.5% 2,16,32,235.63
Grand Total 18,98,82,957.17
*The DPR has the estimate of SLF @ Rs. 3.25 Cr. as CLRI at present is willing to only
allow this much even though the actual cost would be more than Rs. 5.0 Cr.
Means of finance
The sources of finance are:
# Contribution Amount % of the

project cost
I. State Government funding 13,29,18,070.02 30%
II. Government of India through 70%

5,69,64,887.15
ILFADP scheme
Total 18,98,82,957.17
Detailed Cost Estimate

For Upgradation of Module –I
Screen Chamber at inlet
S.NO Qty Description Rate Estimate
Civil Works
1 1 Screen Chamber
228,450.00 228,450.00
Sub total
228,450.00
Mechanical Works
1 1 Mechanical Coarse Bar screen 1158927 1158927
1 2 Control grids for inlet channel 401419 802838

with provision for diversion of
effluent into any one module
of the CETP
Sub total 1961765
Summary
Civil works 228,450.00
Mechanical Works 1,961,765.00
Total 2,190,215.00
Equalization Tank
Civil Work
1 1 Distribution chamber 62352 62352
Sub total 62352
Mechanical Works
1 2 Submersible mixers for module I 415000 830000
2 1 Emergency Eq. effluent Standby 22400 22400

transfer pump -100 m3/h, 4 bar
3 2 Distribution gates - sluice gates - 165250 330500

guide channel
Sub total 1182900
Instrumentation
1 1 Level switch and flow control -I 11525 11525
2 1 EMFM 125200 125200
Sub total 136725
Summary
Civil Works 62,352.00
Instrumentation 136,725.00
Total 1,381,977.00
Chemical Dosing System
Civil Works
1 1 Poly Dosing Tank 33400.4 33400.4
Sub total 33400.4
Mechanical Works
1 2 Metering type dosing Pumps for 72187 144374

alum-I
2 2 Poly Dosing pump- I 60473 120946
Sub total 265320
Summary
Mechanical Works 265,320.00
Total 298,720.40
Primary Clarifier
Mechanical Works
1 1 SS Mechanism for Primary 961000 961000

Clarifier I
Sub total 961000
Summary
Total 961,000.00
Aeration Tank
Mechanical Works
1 1 Diffusers for I- Replacement 1458000 1458000
2 2 Upgradation for Twin lobe to 930100 1860200

trilobe blowers - I
3 2 Anti-Foaming unit 230561 461122
Sub total 3779322
Summary
Total 3,779,322.00
Tertiary Clarifier- Common
Civil Works
1 1 Tertiary Treatment Units 114550 114550
Sub total 114550
Mechanical Works
1 1 Oxidation Dosing system 1960000 1960000

,complete unit
2 2 MGF & ACF @60 m3/h - I 822000 1644000
3 2 MGF & ACF @50 m3/h - II 874500 1749000
4 4 Tertiary Treatment system pump 74500 298000
Sub total 5651000
Summary
Total 5,765,550.00
Effluent & Sludge Collection Tanks
Instrumentation
1 1 Level switch and flow control for 11525 11525

Sludge collection tank

treated effluent collection tank
3 1 EMFM at outlet of treated effluent 125200 125200

collection tank
Sub total 148250
Piping
1 1 Sludge pipe line from primary and 732000 732000
secondary clarifier to Sludge
collection tank
2 1 HDPE pipeline from tertiary 345500 345500

treatment to Effluent collection
tank
sub total 1077500
Summary
Pipeline 1,077,500.00
Total 1,225,750.00
Module –II
Collection line for module II
Civil Works & Piping
1 2.7kms HDPE Pipeline from CFC to CETP

2,628,000.00 2,628,000.00
2 17 RCC manhole
Sub total
2,628,000.00
Summary
Civil works & Piping 2,628,000.00
Total 2,628,000.00
Equalization Tank

Civil Works
1 1 New eq.tank- II 3001441 3001441
Sub total 3001441
Mechanical Works
1 2 Submersible mixers for module 465000 930000

II
2 2 Eq. Effluent Transfer Pump-II 28500 57000
Sub total 987000.00
Piping
1 1 HDPE pipeline from eq.tank to

flash mixer with all accessories 182,000.00 182,000.00
Sub total
182,000.00
Instrumentation
1 1 Level switch and flow control -II 11525 11525
2 1 EMFM 125200 125200
Sub total 136725
Summary
Civil works 3,001,441.00
Pipeline 182,000.00
Total 4,307,166.00
Chemical Dosing System
Civil Works
1 Dosing Tanks 285321 285321
2 1 Flocculator & Flash Mixer 220369.6 220369.6
Sub total 505690.6
Mechanical Works
1 2 Lime Dosing pump-II 65850 131700
2 2 Alum dosing pump-II 72187 144374
3 2 Poly Dosing pump- II 60473 120946
4 2 Phosphate Dosing Pump-II 59513 119026
5 1 Flash mixer mechanism- II 145000 145000
6 1 Floculator mechanism-II 285000 285000
7 2 Lime mixing system 204468 408936
8 2 alum mixing system 204468 408936
9 3 polyelectrolyte mixing unit 474843 1424529
10 1 Phosphate mixing unit 189544 189544
Sub total 3377991
Pipeline
1 1 HDPE effluent pipeline from 264500 264500

flocculator to Primary Clarifier
Sub total 264500
Summary

Pipeline 264,500.00
Total 4,148,181.60
Primary Clarifier
Civil Works
1 1 Primary Clarifier Tank -II 798312.2 798312.2
Sub total 798312.2
Mechanical Works
2 1 Clarifier Mechanism 961000 961000
Sub total 961000
Pipeline
1 1 HDPE effluent pipeline to 172400

aeration tank 1
Sub total 172400
Summary
Pipeline 172,400.00
Total 1,931,712.20
Aeration Tank

Civil Works
1 1 Conventional Aeration Tank 3592579.5 3592579.5

(CAT) 2 ,II
2 1 Extended Aeration Tank(EAT) 2 4920521.5 4920521.5

,II
3 1 Blower House 1027003.1 1027003.1
4 2 Anti Foaming Unit for II 230561 461122
Sub total
10,001,226.10
Mechanical Works
1 600 Fine bubble diffuser -II 9560 5736000
2 2 Trilobe Blower 1446572 2893144
Sub total 8629144
Pipeline
1 1 Pipelines in HDPE for effluent 228000 228000

from aeration tank -1 to
secondary clarifier-1
2 1 Pipelines in HDPE for raw 215000 215000

effluent from aeration tank -2 to
secondary clarifier-2
3 1 Air pipelines - from blowers to 4645000 4645000

subheaders in aeration tanks in
SS, complete with all control
valves, pressure gauges, non-
return valves, bends, T joints, 72
m
Sub total 5088000
Summary
Piping 5,088,000.00
Total 23,718,370.10
Secondary Clarifier
Civil Works
1 2 Secondary Clarifier Tank 1,2 -II 1298465 2596930
Sub total 2596930
Mechanical Works
1 2 Secondary Clarifier Mechanism 664000 1328000

1,2 -II
2 4 Secondary Sludge Recirculation 211772 847088

pump
Sub total 2175088
Piping

from secondary clarifier-1 to
aeration tank-2,

from secondary clarifier to
treated effluent tank/oxidsation
tank
3 1 Sludge pipelines inside the CETP 222520 222520

- recirculation lines from
secondary clarfiiers 1/2 to
aeration tanks 1/2
Sub total 636020
Summary
Piping 636,020.00
Total 5,408,038.00
Effluent & Sludge Collection Tank -II
Civil Works
1 1 Sludge Collection Tank 153478.95 153478.95
2 1 Treated Effluent Collection Tank 4182395 4182395
Sub total 4335873.95
Instrumentation

Sludge collection tank

treated effluent collection tank
3 1 EMFM at oulet of treated effluent 125200 125200

collection tank
Sub total 148250
Piping
1 1 Effluent piping for the tertiary 285000 285000

treatment system - from
oxidisation tank to MGF and
thereafter to ACF
Sub total 285000

Summary
Piping 285,000.00
Total 4,769,123.95
Filter Press
Civil Works
1 1 Filter press building 4182395 4182395
Sub total 4182395
Mechanical Works
1 2 Chamber filter press 4216197.5 8432395
2 2 Filter press feed pump 474000 948000
3 1 Sludge Conditioning System 533000 533000
Sub total 9913395
Piping
Sludge pipelines inside the CETP

- piping from primary &
1 1 334620 334620
secondary clarifiers to
sludge tank
Summary
Piping 3,34,620.00
Total 1,44,30,410.00
Secured Land Fill
Civil Works
1 1 Secured Land Fill 30573069 30573069
Sub total 30573069
Mechanical Works
1 2 Leachate Collection Pump 22500 45000
2 1 Borewell pump for sampling 22500 22500
3 1 Weigh bridge 960000 960000
Sub total 1027500
Piping
1 1 Drinage pipeline 719000 719000
2 1 transfer of leacheate to Eq.tank 185000 185000
Sub total 904000
Summary
Piping 904,000.00
Total 32,504,569.00
MCC Room,Control Room and D.G.Room
Civil Works
1 1 MCC Room, Control room and 3057369 3057369

D.G room
Sub total 3057369
Summary
Total 3,057,369.00
Alternative energy system
Civil works
S. No Qty Description Rate Estimate

(Lot)
1. Solar building
1 1 Site preparation 250,000.00 250,000.00
3 1 Solar building 135,992.67 135,992.67
Subtotal - Civil works 385,992.67
Mechanical works
S. No Qty Description Rate Estimate

(Lot)
1 1 SPV equipment 28633134.5 28633134.5
2 1 Air conditioning equipment for 600,000.00 600,000.00

solar building
3 1 Miscellaneous including grid 1,100,000.00 1,100,000.00

connection
Subtotal: equipment 30,333,134.50
Electrical and instrumentation works
S. No Qty Description Rate

(Lot)
1 1 Cabling, earthing etc., and 880,000.00

required instrumentation
Subtotal: Electrical and instrumentation
Piping works
S. No Qty Description Rate

(Lot)
1 1 Miscellaneous piping works 710,000.00
Mechanical works 30,333,134.50
Electrical and instrumentation works 880,000.00
Piping works 710,000.00
Total 32,309,127.17
D.G Set
Mechanical Works
1 2 D.G Set -110KVA 762781 1525562
Sub total 1525562
Electrical
1 1 Synchronizing panel and 306014 306014

installation charges
Summary
Electrical 306,014.00
Total 1,831,576.00
Lab
Others
1 1 Glassware, Chemicals for regular 705655 705655

analysis
Sub total 705655
Summary
Others 705,655.00
Total 705,655.00
Raw effluent flow meter in member tanneries
Mechanical works
S. Description Rate Estimate

No Quantity
1.00 13.00 Supply, Fixing and

Commissioning of raw effluent 108,780.00 1,414,140.00
flow meters, Data acquisition &
transmission system
2.00 13.00 Raw Effluent transfer pump

22,000.00 286,000.00
Subtotal: Mechanical
1,700,140.00
Piping works
S. Description Rate Estimate

No Quantity
1.00 13.00 Interconnecting pipeline

21,520.00 279,760.00
Subtotal: Instrumentation and
Piping 279,760.00
Summary
Mechanical works 1,700,140.00
Piping works 279,760.00
Total 1,979,900.00
Bar Screen @ PTU
Civil Works & Piping
1 13 Minor civil work

10,000.00 130,000.00
Sub total
130,000.00
Mechanical Item
1 13 SS Bar screen 12mm

14,500.00 188,500.00
sub total
188,500.00
Summary
Mechanical 188,500.00
Total 318,500.00
General Electrical Works for Module I & II
Sr. Description Qty Rate Amount, Rs.

No. .
1 Main PCC 1 1400000.0 1400000.00
0
2 210 KVAr APFC panel comprising of 9 1 275000.00 275000.00

banks
3 Cubicle type MCC 1 nos 250Amp. 4 pole 1 382000.00 382000.00

36 KA MCCB
4 Cubicle type MCC 2 1 nos 125Amp. 4 pole 1 230000.00 230000.00

36 KA MCCB
5 Cubicle type PCC (MCC-3) 1 nos 125Amp. 1 265000.00 265000.00

4 pole 36 KA MCCB
6 Cubicle type MCC (MCC-4) 1 nos 250Amp. 1 243000.00 243000.00

4 pole 36 KA MCCB
7 8 way TPN DB with Double door, 2 21000.00 42000.00

Incoming :63 Amp. 4 pole 16 KA MCCB 1
No, Outgoing :6-32 A SPMCB 18 Nos.
9 1.1 KV grade aluminium / copper Set 2618750

conductor,XLPE insulated, armoured, pvc
outer sheath cables
10 1.1 KV grade aluminium / copper Set 150800

conductor, XLPE insulated, armoured
11 earthing station using Ashlok or eq. safe 4 8500.00 34000.00

earthing electrode T-39 with 3 mt. length
a 25 x 3mm earthing Copper strip 75 400.00 30000.00
13 9.0 mt. long swaged pole 18 45000.00 810000.00
14 125 kVA DG set & associated items 2 1425000.0 2850000.00

0
15 500 kVA 11kV/433V power transformer 1 854000.00 854000
16 Total lighting fixtures, poles and lights 1 404000.00 404000
10588550.00
Fig: 2.1 Site Photographs 600 KLD CETP Under Operation
Fig: 2.2 Proposed Expansion and upgradation to 1100 KLD

2.4 LOCATION OF PROJECT -
Location - Industrial Growth Centre (IGC)

Village - Lassipora
Khasra No. -
District - Pulwama
State - Jammu & Kashmir
Site Coordinates - 330 47’ 17.59’’ N
740 56’ 55.16’’ E
Approach to the - National Highway -1A (NH-1A) is is located at a

site distance of 14 km in East direction.
Nearest railway station is Shri Mata Vaishno Devi

Katra railway station is situated at a distance of 93.6
km in South direction.
Srinagar International Airport is situated at a distance

of 25.9 km in NW direction.
Distance from - Nearest town is Pulwama located at a distance of

nearest waterways 9.18 km in NNW direction.
Seismicity - The project is located in seismic zone V.

There are incidences of earthquake in Jammu &
Kashmir. No significant damage is reported at site
Figure 2.3 -Map showing location of IGC Lassipora in Pulwama district of Jammu &
Kashmir
2.5. SIZE AND THE MAGNITUDE OF THE PROJECT
The project is spread over an area of 6193 Kanals. However, J&K SIDCO proposes to
provide services such as water supply, waste management, sanitation etc. to the villages.
Industrial Estate will have campuses for industries, Industrial plots, rehabilitation and
resettlement facilities, commercial and institutional areas, multi-specialty hospital, etc.
The total plot area for the project 472.31 acres i.e. 19, 11,370.76 m2, Net planned area is
459.56 acres i.e.18,59,773.34 m2. Total built up area is estimated to be 1,41,6850.55
m2. The township project comprises of three different sectors i.e. Sector-27, Sector-28 and
Sector-30. The location of the sectors is marked on Google Earth image as given in the
image below-
Figure 2.4: Location of IGC Lassipora on Google Earth image
2.6 LAND USE PLAN FOR INDUSTRIAL GROWTH CENTRE AT LASSIPORA, PULWAMA
Total land acquired for the project is 6193 kanal. The detailed area break up for
different facilities is as under:-
Table 2.2. Area Statement for Lassipora
S.No. Particulars Area (in Kanals) Percentage
1. Land under Plots 4450 71.85
2. Land under roads 710 11.47
3. Land under green belt 175 2.83
4. Land under effluent plant 20 0.32
5. Land under tubewells 86 1.39
6. Land under container depot 29 0.47
7. Land under grid station 100 1.61
8. Land under receiving stations 10 0.16
9. Land under residential flats 100 1.62
10. Land under Restaurant and shopping 26 0.42
11. Land under Hospital comm. complex 76 1.83
12. Land under LPG plant 272 4.39
13. Land under tanneries 45 0.73
14. Land under Parks 30 0.48
15. Land under Bank, Insurance, Telecom, 24 0.39
fire, police station
16. Land under hotel site, ESI, PF 40 0.64
Table 2.3 Category of Industrial Plots
S.No. Particulars No. of Plots Kanal

1. 100 kanals 7 700
2. 60 kanals 2 120
3. 32 kanals 9 288
4. 16 kanals 65 1040
5. 10 kanals 10 100
6. 8 kanals 148 1184
7. 6 kanals 6 36
8. 4 kanals 205 820
9. 2 kanals 81 162
Total Area = 4450 kanals 100 %
LAND FORM, LAND USE, OWNERSHIP
The Growth centre facilities are to be created over 6193 Kanals of land out of which 1812
of land is to be acquired from private parties at Lassipora and remaining 4381 Kanals
being
government land already under possession of J&K SIDCO over which some development
work has already been commenced.
Land use of the project site: The Growth centre facilities are to be created over 6193
Kanals of land out of which 1812 of land is to be acquired from private parties at Lassipora
and remaining 4381 Kanals being government land already under possession of J&K SIDCO
over which some development work has already been commenced.
2.6.1 GEOGRAPHICAL FEATURES AND TOPOGRAPHY
Pulwama & Srinagar the districts which are influenced by the Growth Centre project bear a
plain topography (being part of the valley surrounded by different mountain ranges). As
regards other geographical features the Srinagar district has geographical area of
2228sq.kms and its total reported area is 51007 hectares. The district is located at an
altitude of 1585m from the sea level the Jammu-Leh National Highway passes through the
district. The topography of the district is predominantly plain except for Kangan block
which falls on the Himalayan ranges. As regarded Pulwama, the district has geographical
area of 1398sq.kms. The district is divided into three zones. Zone-I falling up to 700 Mtrs
and zone-II falling between 1700 and 2000 Mtrs and zone–III falls above 2000 Mtrs. The
first zone covers the entire cultivated area of Pampore and Pulwama Tehsil and major
portion of tral and part of Shopain Tehsil fall in Zone-II. The Higher area of Shopain and
Tral Tehsil are covered with forests extending up to alpine zone.
The ground configuration represents good surface gradient for efficient drainage system.
The average annual rain fall is about 538 millimeter. However, the area is free from floods.
The sufficient quantity of good quality potable ground water is available in the area.
2.6.2. CLIMATE AND CLIMATIC ZONES
The Srinagar District has temperate climate. In summer the climate is pleasant with
maximum temperature ranging between 34 oC whereas in winter the minimum
temperature falls below 0o c and in some of the months the average minimum temperature
is recorded around -5o c. Similar temperature pattern/season pattern is observed in case of
Pulwama district.
As regards rainfall the Srinagar District observed rainfall ranging between 640mm in 1991,
715mm in 1993 and 583mmIn the year 1994. The Pulwama district recorded 538 mm
rainfall in 1991, 785mm in 1993 and 516 in 1994. The region experiences pleasant climate
during April to September whereas remaining period experience cold climate with peak
winter falling during the months of December to February.
Current Status of IGC, Lassipora
1.1 Layout Plan
The leather complex in the IGC complex was implemented by J&K SIDCO. The layout of the
IGC with the CETP marked in red colour is shown in Figure 6:
Figure 2.5: Layout of Leather Park at Lassipora IGC

The CETP was implemented based on the design provided by CLRI and was stated to be the
first common effluent treatment plant in the State. The CETP was commissioned in 2011
and inaugurated by the then State Industries Minister, Shri S S Slathia on 7 Dec 2011.
2.7 Details of Tanneries at IGC

The list of tanneries at IGC is given below
Table: 2.4 Details of Tanneries in IGC
# Name of the unit Land Current Status Personnel

allotted level of employed
Kanals production
1 M/s B.A. Rawenda & Bros 14.00 1000/day Operational 22
2 M/s Ream Tannery, Sameer 11.00 550/day Operational 31
3 M/s Universal Tanning 8.00 1000/day Operational 20
Company
4 M/s Golden Tanners 2.00 400/day Ready to start 35
5 M/s Sun Rise Estate 3.00 1000/day Registered 24
yet to start.
6 M/s Shahara International 4.00 - -do- 24
7 M/s Mir Leather Tannery 3.00 - -do- 19

8 M/s Baba Tanneries 4.00 - -do- 24
9 M/s Kawa Tanneries 7.00 - Building 25
ready
10 M/s Sheikh Tanneries 7.00 - -do- 25
11 M/s Darial Leather 8.00 - -do- 31
12 M/s Tanwell Tanneries (p) 17.00 - Completed, 0
Ltd. not yet
operational
13 M/s Tan-tek Tanneries (p) 13.00 - -do- 0
Ltd.
Total 101.00 280
2.8Basic Data of CETP
The satellite image of the existing CETP may be seen below:
Fig: 2.6 Location of CETP
Basic data on IGC CETP is in Table 2.5.

Table 2.5: Basic data on IGC-CETP
Total number of tanneries, expected to operate in IGC 13

Number of tanneries operating now 4
Raw material processed Cow, sheep and goat
Type pf production Raw to wet blue
Total production capacity of tanneries 30 tonnes per day
Current operational capacity in the cluster 15 tonnes per day
Designed flow rate to the CETP 600 m3/d
Current flow rate to the CETP 300 m3/d
Commissioning date of the CETP 2011
The existing CETP has been built for treatment of about 600 m3/d of tannery effluent from
processing raw hides/skins to wet blue stage. The existing scheme of the CETP is presented
in Figure2.7.
Pre Treatment Unit - Baffle chamber, Bar Screen Effluent conveyance –gravity line
Clarifier (without scrapper)Flocculation channel Flash mixer Equalization Tank
Alum
Alum Lime
First stage aeration tank with diffused aeration
Filtrate sump Primary Sludge Drying Beds
Second stage aeration tank with diffused aeration Secondary clarifier-1

Secondary clarifier-2
Secondary sludge drying beds

Treated
effluent
Figure: 2.7 Existing Scheme of Lassipora IGC CETP
2.8.1Effluent inflow details
The CETP currently receive about 300 m3/d effluent, as against the designed capacity of
600 m3/d. While the tannery effluent quantity shall increase in future when the new units
get operational and when existing tanneries move towards making finished leather as the
CFC becomes functional, the chance of new effluents from other type of industry coming to
the CETP has been reported to be low.
2.8.2. Operational parameters of the CETP
The average characteristics of raw effluent, secondary stage (biological) treated effluent
for the last six months are provided in the following table 2.6.
Table 2.6 Characteristics of raw effluent, equalized effluent, Primary effluent and
secondary treated effluent
Stage of
pH COD TSS BOD Chlorides Sulphates
Treatment
Raw effluent 7.2 1220 2245 825
2750 3145
Equalized effluent 7.3 1280 2220 880
2825 3160
Primary treated 7.1 905 2045 725
1920 135
Secondary treated 7.2 32 2140 780
385 85
2.9Project requirements in CETP

 Scope for improvement in the tannery level
 Pre-treatment units in connected tanneries
A CETP can function effectively, only if adequate pre-treatment in individual tanneries is

ensured before the effluent is let into the collection and conveyance lines.
It is not clear if the pre-treatment units installed in all connected tanneries are similar. The
one pre-treatment unit visited by the delegation at the Universal tannery was similar to
ones installed in tanneries connected to the CETPs in Vellore District, which needs a good
level of Operation, maintenance and monitoring. As such, no issues were indicated in the
collection & conveyance lines and it is presumed that an effective pre-treatment system is
available in all the tanneries connected to the CETP.
However, when all tanneries start their operation, it would be necessary to maintain a good
pre-treatment and recommendations in this regard need to be put in place. The pre-
treatment system suggested as a standard is as follows:
The major objective of on-site wastewater treatment at the tanneries is the removal of
coarse materials, grit and grease, in order to reduce clogging and siltation problems in the
wastewater collection network, with the related risks of accumulation of H2S gas in the
collection network.
It is desirable to have separate collection of chromium containing tannery effluent, in order

to enable the recovery and use of waste chromium as a tanning agent, and to reduce the
chromium concentration in the wastewater and the sludge generated in the CETP.
The beamhouse liquors contain large quantities of coarse and suspended materials. The
system for preliminary treatment of beamhouse liquors is designed for removal of coarse
materials, grit, grease and easily settleable solids.
The system suggested consists of the following components:
 Effluent channel with 2 screens for retaining coarse materials and a baffle chamber to
retain floating materials and grease.
 grit chamber for very small tanneries and a conical settling tank for others.
 sludge drying and storage bed.
The effluent, after settling, may be collected in a sump, from where it could be pumped
through a flow metering system to the manhole in the effluent conveyance line.
It is desirable to install similar pre-treatment system for the non-tannery units too. The
pre-treatment system at dairy units may additionally be given a grease removal system,
basically an API oil separator.
Flow metering & distribution of CETP O & M charges

Design Capacity 0-50 cu.m/h
Major Components Flow Meter, 13-Nos.

Proposed
Justification 1. Since online connectivity is mandatory as per CPCB

norms, Flow meters are proposed.
2. Proposed meters will help to monitor and ensure correct
volume of discharge as well as data collection online for
24 x 7.
3. There shall be provisions to connect the meter to the
central server at the CETP that can in turn send data to
Water Quality Watch of CPCB .
Category Upgradation of CETP
Type of intervention New
If upgradation -
Benefit 1. Tamper Proof Meters with accurate flow measurements,

2. 24 x 7 Online Monitoring
Measurable Output 1. Online flow meters with connectivity to servers.
2. Discharge volume control,
The sharing of the O & M charges at present is done based on the capacity utilization. A
more systematic and scientific method is to distribute the cost based on (a) a fixed cost,
based on allotted capacity to each member tanneries and (b) a variable cost based on actual
flow rates to the CETP. The recommendations in this regard are given elsewhere in this
report. In any case, installation of flow meters at the outlet of each member units
(tanneries and non-tannery members of the CETP) appears necessary.
Absence of water and wastewater metering also hampers water conservation and waste
minimization. Accordingly, it is proposed to carry out the following activities under this
project:
 Supply, installation and commissioning of electromagnetic flow meters for

measurement of wastewater to CETP in tanneries/non-tannery members and CETP
units
 Necessary pump and piping for wastewater pumping.
Operating conditions
Service : Effluent water
Operating temperature : 40°C
Flow ranges : 0-50 m3/hr
Product configuration : Flow, Transmitter and totalizer

Model : FMF-2040
Lining material : PTFE
Flow meter size : 50NB
Display : 16 character backlit DOT matrix LCD
Keyboard : 50key sealed tactile
Units : LPS/LPM/LPH
Calibration : Digitally programmable
Electrode : Haste alloy C
Grounding type : Rings
Grounding ring material : SS 304
Process connection : Sandwiched
Protection class : IP65
Password protection : Required
Accuracy : 0.5% of F.S
Scope for improvement of CETP scheme
Coarsescreen at the inlet
Name of the item Bar Screen-10 mm spacing
Design Capacity 1100 KLD, 60m3/h
Major Components (1) Bar Screen 10 mm spacing

Proposed (2) R.C.C Chamber
Justification 1. The MOC existing bar screen is Mild steel, since the bar is placed
in high corrosive environment the bar screen’s spacing
increases where the solids particle escapes; this leads to
frequent chocking in collection line.
2. So new SS Bar screen is proposed.
Category Upgradation of CETP -
Type of Upgradation of existing

intervention
If upgradation Capacity and technology
Benefit (1) Frequency of cleaning is reduced

(2) Trouble free operation
Measurable Output (1) Bar screen with chamber
It will be better to provide a coarse screen followed by a mechanical fine screen at the inlet
of equalization tank with about 15 mm and 6 mm bar spacing respectively to provide
protection to the CETP units. The bar spacing of coarse shall ensure removal of larger
solids and foreign materials in the effluents (e.g. a gunny bag or leather pieces) entering
the equalization tank and protect the fine screen from clogging. The 6 mm fine screen
could be of Aqua-rake type with continuously moving rakes combing the bar screen. Both
screens can be installed in an inlet channel to equalization tank.
The construction of the channel can be made in such a way that it can receive effluent from
the existing collection and conveyance system and also the effluent from the proposed new
conveyance lines from CFC and tannery wet finishing operations. The channel can have
sluice gates, openable by turning spindles, to regulate effluent flow to both the existing as
well as new CETP module.
Technical specification of screen

Manual coarse bar screen & screen chamber
Screen chamber dimensions 2.5 m x 0.8 m x 4.0 m depth
Construction RCC, M 25.
Inlet/outlet Common to both existing and proposed
modules of the CETP
Capacity 60-80 m3/h
Bar space 10 - 20 mm
Bar width 6 mm
MOC of screen SS
Make Supplier fabricated
Quantity 1 nos.
The fine screen shall be installed in the raw effluent channel to be constructed as common
units for the two module of the CETP. The capacity of the screen shall be 100 m3/h,
equivalent to a peak flow of a total daily flow of 1000 m3. The opening of the screen bars
would be 3 mm.
Mechanical bar screen

Design Capacity 100 m3/h
Major Components Mechanical bar screen,

Proposed
Justification 1. At present there is no fine screen at CETP inlet and

the solids entering the equalization tank reduces the
efficiency of subsequent units and pumps.
2. Also, to reduce the risk of manual cleaning, it is
recommended to use mechanized rake bar screen.
If upgradation -
Benefit 1. Self-cleaning screen reduces manpower

2. Low maintenance cost
3. Reduces the risk percentage, safety is ensured.
Measurable Output 1. Mechanical bar screen
2. Drive motor 1HP, sprocket chain type.
The effluent will be collected in receiving sump through the mechanical bar screen.
Automatic rake type screen is suggested for installation in the channels. The screen to have
a hydraulic capacity of 100m3/h as peak load considering the discharge of wastewater is
mostly during the day-time. The screens have a slot width of 6 mm.
The automatic rake is a self-cleaning filter system which can be installed directly in an open
channel. The filter surface consists of an endless belt of high quality stainless steel fingers,
which is moved by chains and a motor drive. The fingers are protruding outward by the
rotating motion around the sprocket, ejecting the solids. Automatic cleaning is achieved by
a reverse curve in the path, which causes the fingers to retract and to be wiped clean
against the neighbouring fingers.
The screenings, from each unit, drop into a container, which is emptied regularly and
transported for disposal in the sludge landfill.
Electromagnetic flow meter at effluent inlet channel
Design Capacity 0-50 cu.m/h
Major Components Flow Meter at inlet of equalization tank

Proposed
Justification 1. At present, there is no flow measurement at the inlet of

CETP.
2. JKPCB stipulate measurement of flow at inlet and outlet.
3. Accordingly an electromagnetic flow meter is proposed at
the inlet of equalization tank.
If upgradation -
Benefit 1. Meeting the legal requirement of JK PCB.

2. Better control of treatment parameters.
Measurable Output 1. Flow meter at inlet of equalization tank.
2. Discharge volume control,
To have a counter check of flow from the individual member units and that received at the
CETP, it is suggested to have an ultrasonic meter at the raw effluent channel. The unit will
have measurement shown instantaneously on a display unit and can have cumulative
values in the totalizer.
Submersible mixers in equalization tank

Name of the item Submersible mixers
Design Capacity 1 KW, 2 Nos.
Major Components (1) Submersible mixer, 2 Nos.

Proposed
Justification (1) At present there are no mixers available in the eq.tank.

(2) Due to this the solids gets accumulated at the bottom of the
tank. As a result, the volume of the tank get reduced and proper
homogeneous mixing does not occur.
(3) Hence two submersible mixers have been proposed.
If upgradation
Benefit (1) Homogeneous mixing of Effluent

(2) Keeps solids in suspension, which reduces the cleaning cycle.
(3) Accumulation of solids at bottom of the tank is reduced.
Measurable Output (1) Submersible mixers – 2nos.
The equalization tank may be provided with two numbers of submersible mixers of ABS,
Flygt or Grundfoss make. The installation may be supplemented with lifting arrangements
on one side of the tank. The mixers need to be installed facing each other to ensure
optimum mixing.
Type of tank Circular
Mixing Equipment Submersible Mixer
MOC of Mixer SS 316
MOC of Motor housing SS 316
Power rating 1 kW
Make ABS / Grundfos / Eqvt.
Quantity 2 Nos.
Poly Electrolyte Dosing System
Name of the item Poly Electrolytic dosing system
Design Capacity 10-50 lph
Major Components Dosing tank, Agitator and dosing pumps.

Proposed
Justification (1) Since coagulant takes more time to form flocs, proper settling
in clarifier cannot be ensured.
(2) To enhance the coagulation process poly electrolyte is added.
Type of New
intervention
If upgradation
Benefit (1) Better solids settling in primary clarifier.

(2) More compact sludge for dewatering.
Measurable Output (1) PE dosing system
The polyelectrolyte solution from the Polyelectrolyte solution preparation tanks shall be
pumped by the use of Polyelectrolyte solution dosing pumps to the flash mixer where Alum
solution and Lime solution will also be added to the raw effluent after screening.
These pumps shall be capable of pumping the 1 % Polyelectrolyte solution calculated on

the basis of 2.5 mg/l of 100 % liquid Polyelectrolyte. The actual dosage needed for his
equipment can be met by a pump duty of 20 liters per hour. The pumps shall be able to
pump the Lime solution from the ground floor level to the flash mixer, which shall have its
operating water level at minimum of 4 m above ground level. Thus, the static head shall be
4 m in the worst case plus a friction head of say 2m. The total head required shall thus be
taken as 8 m for design purposes.
There shall be two dosing pumps of which one shall be working and the other standby at
any time.These shall be of the electromechanical type. They shall have a mechanically
actuated diaphragm with high precision finished balls and seats for reliable sealing. These
shall permit manual override and variable flow control at both sides of the chosen median
duty point for the duty already stated herein. These shall be able to handle a flow variation
of plus or minus 25 % of the stated flow and at a head of not less than 7m at the highest
flow. The construction shall be totally enclosed corrosion proof type. The liquid end shall
be in SS 316. The body shall be of lightweight Aluminium Alloy. The drive motor shall be of
fire proof and explosion proof construction. The turndown ratio shall be 10: 1 with a
tolerance of (-) 5 % to (+) 10 %. The variable setting shall be achieved by variable speed
drive or electronic capacitance control. The pump erection shall provide for a thrust block
against alignment slippages. The repeatability shall be within 5 % on both sides of the duty
point.
The equipment shall include drive motor, direct coupling, turbine impeller assembly,
intermediate bearings, basket, walkway with handrails and such other fittings, devices or
appurtenances necessary for a complete operating installation.
Poly tank agitator
Size 1.0 m x 1.0 m x 1.25 m +0.3 m FB
MOC SS
Type Turbine
Power 0.5 kW
Quantity 1 nos.
Poly dosing pump
Capacity 10 - 50 LPH
Pressure 1.0 kg/cm2
MOC SS
Type Glandless / metering
Make Process / Prominent / Eqvt.
Quantity 1 Nos.
Primary clarifier scrapper mechanism

Name of the item Primary Clarifier mechanism
Design Capacity 90m3/day,
Major Components (1) Clarifier mechanism in SS

Proposed
Justification (1) MoC of present system is mild steel, whichare corroded
frequently, requiring replacement and increasing O & M
costs.
(2) Sedimentation has reduced from the required level of 90% to
70% now affecting upstream process.
(3) It is proposed to upgrade the present system with SS 304
which is non-corrosive and has higher life expectancy.
(4) With new system in place, optimum sedimentation can be
achieved benefitting upstream process.
Type of Upgradation of existing

intervention
If upgradation Technology
Benefit (1) Down Time Reduction,

(2) Overall treatment qquality Improvement,
(3) O&M Cost reduction
Measurable Output 1. Life Expectancy, Output Quality
2. Clarifier mechanism in SS 304
Though it would have been better to have an additional primary clarifier unit since the size
of the existing one is smaller than the requirement, the same may be done at a later date
and for the present, installation of a scrapper mechanism in this tank is suggested to
optimize the performance.
A 4.5 meter diameter primary clarifier mechanism may be installed complete with
walkway in MS ‘I’ beam with stainless steel (SS 304) chequered plates and other standard
access
ories.
Technical specification is given below,
Primary Clarifier Mechanism
Size 4.5 m dia x 2.5 m SWD
Surface loading rate l9 - 20 m3/m2/day

MOC Feed well FRP
MOC of underwater parts SS 304
Bridge SS 304 with MS I beam
Power 0.5 kW
Quantity 1 no.
There shall be one primary clarifier mechanism suitable for installation in concrete tank
4.5 m internal diameter x 2.5-m side water depth having inward slopping hopper floor with
1 vertical to 12 horizontal slope. The mechanism shall be of the center drive type with a
torque of not less than 2500 m-kg and shall be supported on an RCC influent column with
the flow entering the bottom of the influent column and flowing upward to the inlet
openings near the water level. The equipment shall include center assembly with drive
unit, lifting mechanism for raising sludge scraper assembly, feed well, center cage, sludge
removal rake arms with sweeper blades & squeegees, two numbers scum skimmers with
respective scum boxes, weirs, baffles, walkway with handrails, anchor bolts and such other
fittings, devices or appurtenances as are necessary for a complete operating installation. It
is quite likely that there may be instances wherein, the sludge may bet accumulated at the
floor of the clarifier to a height that would impose a torque higher than the drive rated
torque for the equipment. In such situations, it is proposed to lift the entire suspended cage
and sludge scraper assembly and the scum scraper assembly clear of the floor in
increments up to a maximum of 30 cm, such that there will be continued sludge removal
and progressively better control on getting over the accumulated sludge situation. Such
lifting is desired to be achieved by an electromechanical control provided with a manual
override.
The influent flow rate shall be 0.5 mld spread uniformly through the day and night with an
instantaneous peaking of close to plus or minus 5 %. The inlet BOD and SS are to be taken
as 2000 mg/l and 4000 mg/l respectively. The dosage of chemicals to this primary clarifier
is from an upstream flash mixer and flocculator. The chemical dosages are computed as
Lime 200 gm/ m3; Aluminium Sulphate 200 gm/m3; Anionic polyelectrolyte 2.5 gm/m3.
The BOD reduction is 50 % and the SS reduction is 80%.
The drive assembly for each clarifier shall consist of a drive motor, helical gear box, steel
roller chain drive, turntable type worm gear assembly, visual torque indicator, overload
alarm and cut off actuating system. The drive motor shall be of the TEFC type suitable for
operation in standard commercially available 3 phase, 50 cycle, 415 volts supply with its
inherent variations in voltage and / or frequency. The power transmission between the
first reducer and the worm gear assembly shall be through a chain and sprocket drive,
which shall be enclosed in a fiberglass chain guard. The worm gear assembly shall consist
of a case hardened and ground alloy steel worm (EN353/equv hardness 50-52 Rc) and Cast
Iron worm wheel (IS: 210 grade FG260), all placed within a graded cast iron housing (IS:
210 grade FG200) complete with oil fill, level and drain fittings. The turntable base shall be
made of cast Iron (IS: 210 grade FG200. The worm gear shall be running on a built-up large
diameter precision bearing assembly consisting of high chrome alloy steel bearing balls
(AFBMA Gr 500, 62-65 RC) and four replaceable hardened alloy steel inserts (AISI
4140/equivalent 36- 38 Rc final Hardness) pressed into the annular grooves in the gear
and turntable base all running in an oil bath. The base will have provision for dust seal and
complete with oil fill, level and drain fittings. All gears and bearings shall run in an oil bath.
Readily accessible lubricant fill and drainpipes with necessary fittings shall be provided.
The drive worm shaft shall be free to move horizontally within the limits afforded by a
calibrated compression spring at the thrust end. The worm shaft movement shall be
transmitted to the drive control by a pin contacting the cam support and camshaft, thereby
actuating the pointer. The pointer shall indicate relative torque load on a 0 to 100%
graduated scale. Four cams and limit switches shall be included. Cams shall be
independently adjustable over the full torque range. The limit switches shall be shop-
adjusted to sound an alarm, and stop the drive motor at predetermined torque settings.
Switches and cams shall be mounted in a weatherproof steel box having conduit terminal
strips. The drive shall be designed for a duty rated torque of 2500 Kg-M with the main gear
and pinion set designed for a yield torque of at least four times the duty rated torque. The
drive main bearing shall be designed for a B10 bearing life of minimum 20 years with
continuous operation & full total rotating mechanism weight.
A center drive platform shall provide access to the center assembly and drive control. It
shall consist of Stainless Steel 304 grating type floor plate with necessary structural steel
stiffeners and supports, resting on the center assembly, and provided with connections to
the walkway. The platform shall be surrounded by handrails 1000 mm high.
There shall be a fixed feed well and it shall be hung from the bridge superstructure. The
inlet feed pipe which is brought from the periphery of the clarifier and supported from the
bridge superstructure will empty out in to the feed well. The diameter of the feed well shall
be between 22% to 25% of the diameter of the clarifier so as to limit the downward
velocity calculated on full plan area of the feed well not exceeding 1.5 m / sec. The
immersed depth of the feed well shall be between 55 % to 65 % of the side water depth of
the clarifier. The material of the feed well and all fixtures either partly or wholly exposed to
atmosphere or fully submerged shall all be of MS FRP/epoxy coated. The thickness of the
feed well shall not be less than 8 mm.
A steel adapter shaft will connect to the main gear of the centre drive. The lower pipe shaft
which is attached to the adapter shaft through suitable flanged connection will support and
rotate the rake arms. The lower shaft will be of adequate size to carry the applied torque
and bending loads. Steel fitments are provided in the pipe shaft to connect the rake arms
and cone scrapers. The centre shaft will be lined with ss316 liners so that 30 cm on
bothsides of the wastewater interface at all times including the fully lifted condition to
prevent corrosion from the waterline and propagate to the whole assembly.
The width of the full diameter bridge shall include provision for housing the lifting
mechanism. The effective width of the central walkway within the bridge shall be minimum
1m wide. Handrails shall be provided for the full width as also the width of the walkway
supported by the drive platform at the center and the tank walls at its outer end and shall
be designed to safely withstand all normal operating loads. It shall consist of two (2) side
wide flange beams of welded steel construction, with the walkway of MSEP grating floor
plate supported by the cross members. A toe plate of 150 mm height made of 3mm thick SS
304 sheet shall be provided on both the running edges. The height of protective hand
railing & piping shall be 1100 mm from walkway upto the top row of piping and the steel
member supporting this piping shall not project for more than 10 cm above this level and
shall be finished with levelled edges. The piping shall be in three rows of MSEP 32 NB size
thick-walled and vertically spaced at 30cm, 60cm and 90 cm from walkway elevation. The
horizontal spacing of the steel members supporting these pipes shall not exceed 1.5m
center to center. These shall be integrally welded to the steel tensile members of the bridge.
All structural steel members and fasteners used in the construction of the bridge shall be
hot dip galvanized.
The sludge raker mechanism shall be a full diameter installation of either the parabolic or
radial alignment of the scraper in plan. In either case, the assembly shall be dynamically
balanced in design and erection and the material shall be of steel truss construction with
steel raking blades and adjustable neoprene squeegees. The blades shall be spaced to
insure complete raking of the tank bottom twice per each revolution and pushing the
sludge to the sludge pit at the center. The raker arms shall be attached to the cage with
provision for adjusting their slope. The rake arm truss and blades shall be fabricated from
rolled / formed steel sections having a minimum thickness of 6 mm and all designed to
meet the full torque capacity of the central drive. The tip speed of the arms shall be not
more than 4 m per minute.
The overflow weir shall be of SS 304 plate of 150 mm depth and minimum 3 mm thickness.
The V notches shall be of 90 degrees cut and shall have a center to center distance of the
troughs at 150 cm. The depth of the notch shall be 50 mm.
All fasteners in contact with effluent shall be SS 304 and others of hot dipped galvanized
steel.
Modification in aeration tanks

Name of the item Modification in aeration tanks
Design Capacity --
Major Components (1) Fine bubble Diffusers

Proposed (2) Stainless steel pipes
Justification 1. Presently, the aeration system has old coarse bubble type
diffusers which are not efficient. It is therefore proposed to
replace it with fine bubble diffusers.
2. The New diffuser have high oxygen transfer efficiency and its
MOC is membrane type resistant to hydrocarbons, oil and
grease.
Type of New
intervention
If upgradation
Benefit (1) High Oxygen transfer efficiency

(2) Resistant to HC, Oil and Grease
Measurable Output (1) Diffuser- nos
While the aeration system appears to be by and large fine, it could also do with some
modifications. Some of the diffusers apparently have got blocked and some others torn,
which may be replaced with new ones.
Further, a dosing arrangement for silicone based de-foamer to control the frothing and
foam may need to be installed. The arrangement can be a portable unit, complete with
defoamer storage tank, pressure pump and jet nozzle to spray the solution to the tank.
This comprises the air Compressors including air filters, driers, mufflers with electrical
motors, piping to diffusers and the diffusers thereof.
The aeration tank (high load activated sludge with sludge loading rate of 0.3 Kg BOD per Kg
sludge dry solids per day) BOD degradation is 93.3% (Kg/day). A Fine bubble diffused
aeration system will be applied. Such system has been selected, because of less aeration
tank space requirements, higher energy efficiency and less problems with fugitive aero-sol
emissions as may be otherwise caused by surface aerators.
The diffuser elements shall be membrane type and resistant to such ingredients as
hydrocarbons, oil and grease and afford high oxygen transfer rate besides permitting
simple erection onto the horizontal air manifold and easy retrieval above the liquid surface
by lifting the air vertical header feeding the horizontal air manifold and shall have
minimum coupling / attachments to the air manifold and shall have self-cleaning
properties while in action. Flat surfaces facing upwards as membrane surfaces shall not be
accepted. The diffuser unit shall be of corrosion resistant material. The membrane diffusers
shall permit connection to the air manifolds of circular or square cross section and the
entire lot of diffusers shall be capable of discharging air of 17000 N m3 per hour when
installed in the said aeration tanks. The wastewater dissolved solids content close to about
15000 mg/l and desired minimum residual dissolved oxygen of 2 mg/l under field
condition in the summer temperature of 42  Celsius and winter temperature of 24 
Celsius shall be duly taken into consideration.
The headers onto which the diffusers are fixed shall be of standard SS304 pipe sections or
Polypropylene flexible tubes of suitable inner bore and shape with custom fixities of the
diffuser elements as directed by the membrane manufacturers. Alternative pipe materials
shall be acceptable provided the same are mandatory part of the diffuser supplier and has
been in their line of supply as original equipment. These headers shall also be procured
from the equipment manufacturers who are the suppliers of the membrane diffuser
suppliers. These headers shall have enough counterweight to surmount any buoyancy lift
from the floor during air charging. The connection between the headers and the air piping
from the compressor shall preferably permit a “quarter-turn” fitment and “quarter-turn”
dismantling. This segment shall be assembled and installed above the water surface
elevation and in the horizontal travel of the air piping. The coupling shall have a minimum
of two neoprene washers to ensure against chance leakage of air. Alternatively, flanged
fittings of the same SS 304 material shall also be permissible. Each header shall travel
downward from the air piping by aligning itself onto the sidewall of the aeration tank and
thereafter travel horizontally onto the tank floor. Suitable mechanical provision for lifting
of headers easily above water level for maintenance without the need for draining the tank
shall be provided for each header. Isolating valves of Polypropylene shall be provided
upstream of the coupling to cut off the flow through the specified header for purposes of
attending to the diffuser header and also diffusers.
The air piping from the compressor to the header shall be of UPVC material and rated for 6
kg / cm2 These shall be fixed securely to the concrete surfaces in the horizontal plane and
vertical plane so that they are not clamped horizontally onto vertical sides of the walls. The
clamping shall be so designed as to permit “in-situ” screw driven fittings. Breaking open
concrete surfaces shall not be permitted.
There shall be three numbers of air-cooled functioning air compressors each rated at 750
Nm3 / hour at a pressure adequate to command the diffuser grid under both the summer
and winter air temperatures at 35.4 degrees Celsius and 13.6 degrees Celsius and relative
humidity upto 85 % and maintain a residual D O of minimum 1 mg/l and shall furnish the
necessary calculations in the technical bid. The air compressors shall be dynamically
balanced to grade 6.3 of ISO 1940 and its latest modifications. It shall be integral with twin
lobe compressor with suction filer, silencers for suction and discharge filled with
appropriate environment friendly material [Asbestos shall not be accepted], non-return
valves, drive guards, grease and anti-oil –splash bearings, the gears shall be helical or worm
and shall be made of appropriate hardened and X ray finished material. All bearings shall
be antifriction ball bearings. The offered equipment shall be of the standard product range
from manufacturers who have a successful track record of manufacture, supply, delivery,
erection, commissioning and servicing. The rotary speed of the compressor for this rated
output shall not exceed 1800 rpm under its maximum output in the performance curve.
The rated duty shall be obtainable at the midpoint of the compressor performance curve. It
shall be possible to obtain an increase of (or) reduction of the air flow rate by plus or minus
30 % of the rated output at the best efficiency point. In all cases, the compressor shall be
able to withstand and counter a pressure of minimum 62 kPa without any failures or
freezing or stalling. The rotary speed of one of the compressor shall be adjustable without
the need to stop the running compressor and this shall be achieved by the use of a
microprocessor based AC variable frequency drive running the motors of the compressors.
The compressors shall have precision crank wheel transmission, oil mist greased bearings
with ball bearings, three-part clutch, muffler and other equipment needed for safe
operation. The compressor housing shall be cast iron grade 25 and the impeller of Dural
and suitable for a pressure proportion of 1: 3.5. The axle closure shall be by means of sole
labyrinth closure with parts of steel, bronze and nodular cast iron. The housing shall permit
the inspection of the impeller / lobes without the need to dismantle the housing. Each
compressor shall be equipped with a conus diffuser for converting 90 % of the velocity
energy into pressure ad also with an intermediate piece and a rubber compensator. The
compressor shall be tested in accordance with BS 1571 Part II or equivalent standards. The
base frame mounting shall be complete with anti-vibration pads. The air on release from
the compressor shall pass through a set of filters, driers and differential pressure.
Mechanical sludge dewatering
Name of the item Chamber Filter press
Design Capacity Filter press – 4t/day
Major Components (1) Filter press with all accessories.

Proposed
Justification (1) Sludge generated in plant is presently dewatered by solar

sludge drying bed which take many days for complete
dewatering.
(2) During rains and winter the dewatering need longer period.
(3) To handle this issue a Chamber filter press is proposed.
If upgradation -
Benefit (1) Lesser O & M costs.

(2) Better dewatering of sludge leading to safer and easier
transport to SLF.
Measurable Output (1) Chamber filter press – 4t/d - 2nos.
In order to ensure effective sludge dewatering, mechanical sludge dewatering in place of

the sludge drying beds may be considered. The options for a mechanical dewatering
include a centrifuge, vaccum filter and a chamber filter. A comparison of merits and
demerits of different sludge dewatering system could be seen below:
System Advantages Disadvantages

Sludge drying Lowest operational cost Large land requirement
beds Very effective in summer Moderate investment cost
Requires little maintenance Ineffective in rainy season
No requirement of skilled High labour requirement
operators Operation is not continuous
Chamber filter Higher concentration of solids in System is not a closed one and
press dried cake (30 -40%) possibility of some bad odor
Low power for operation during operation
Lower requirement of Operator attention required is
conditioning chemical relatively high
Very little water is required for Operation is not continuous
cleaning Need for periodical replacement
Can produce almost solid free of filter cloth
filtrate Higher installation cost
Can use commonly available Higher requirement of labor
chemicals such as lime and iron Comparatively higher space
salts for conditioning
requirement.
Proven experience with tannery
Need for separate sludge
effluent sludge conveyor if not installed in first
Local manufacturers are floor.
available
Relatively higher maintenance
cost of feed pump
Decanter Operation is continuous High cost of operation
centrifuge Lowest space requirement (polyelectrolyte dosage 80-200
Lower installation cost ppm)
Relatively less affected by inlet Higher power consumption

sludge concentrations Filtrate at times can contain high
Can treat sludge with high solids content, which may need
organic content separate filtration (in sludge
drying beds, etc.)
Operation is relatively clean
Lower solid concentration in
Lower requirement of flushing
dewatered sludge ( 20 – 27%)
water
Frequent bearing failure
The system is a closed one
resulting in cleaner Requirement of precision
comparatively odour free polyelectrolyte dosing system
environment
Proven experience with tannery
effluent sludge
Local manufacturers are
available
Vacuum filter Low power for operation High cost of operation
Operation is continuous (polyelectrolyte)
Low space requirement Low cake solid concentration
Proven experience with tannery Requirement of precision
sludge polyelectrolyte dosing system
Adapted for higher sludge Non uniform discharge of sludge
dewatering capacities feed from the central wedge zone
Produces sludge with medium Need for a separate conveyor for
dryness (22-28%) dewatered sludge
System is not a closed one and
possibility of bad odour during
operation
Need for periodical replacement
of filter cloth
Need for continuous cleaning and
requirement of high quantity of
flushing water
Relatively higher needs for safety
protection for operators.
After carefully considering merits and demerits of each system and the CETPs experience
with sludge drying beds, it is proposed to have a chamber filter press for IGC CETP.
2 Nos. of chamber filter presses of 4 t/d (20 hours’ operation) have been recommended for
this purpose. The unit can be fully automatic with feed pump generating 16 bar pressure
for good dewatering. The installation would need the presses installed at a mezzanine level
with portion below to house a trailer for collecting the dewatered sludge.
It is proposed to have another module of CETP, of 500 m3/d capacity,in the second phase.
When that unit gets operational, another filter press would be needed. In order to optimize
the utilization, it is proposed to use the standby unit recommended here for the CETP
upgradation as standby for the future filter press too. Accordingly, when the additional
module of CETP is functional, there will be a total of 3 filter press of 4 t/d capacity, one for
each of the upgraded and new CETP modules and one as a common standby.
Technical specification:
Lime tank & agitator for sludge conditioning
Size 1 m x 1 m x 1.7 m +0.3 m FB
Construction RCC, M 20.

MOC of mixer SS
Type Turbine
Power 0.75 kW
Quantity 1 No.
Lime dosing pump for conditioning
Capacity 50 – 100 LPH
Pressure 1.0 kg/cm2
MOC SS
Quantity 1 No.
Filter House
Construction Masonry with RCC pillars and
Mezzanine floor in RCC with sheet

roof.
Dimensions 16 m x 9 m x 6.5 m.
Side walls Brick wall and jally work,
Front portion Open with rolling shutters.
Bottom floor Grano floor with ramp.
Filter press mechanism
Capacity 4 t/day
Size 1.0 m x 1.0 m
Type Chamber
Operating pressure 15 kg/cm2
No. of cylinder 96
No. of plates 95
Chamber plate depth 30 mm
Press capacity 2850 liters
Material of filter pack polypropylene
Plate shifting automatic
Power 2.5 kW
Make Andritz / Hydropress /Dinshaw / Eqvt.
Quantity 2 nos. (1 W + 1S)
Filter press feed pump
Capacity 2-5 m3/h
Pressure 15.0 kg/cm2
Type Progressive cavity
MOC rotor Hardened tool Steel
MOC of stator Nemo Last S65/neoprene
Joint Pin joint
Base plate MS
Power 2 kW
Make Nemo / Tushaco / Eqvt.
Quantity 2 nos. (1 W + 1 S)
Accordingly, the filter house may be constructed with provisions for installing three filter
presses in the same house.
Parameter Unit Value
Design flow into the CETP m3/d 1100
Equalised effluent flow m3/d 1188
suspended solids at inlet mg/l
Average TSS at primary clarifier outlet mg/l
Suspended solids removed in Primary treatment kg/d
TSS load from chemicals added in primary kg/d 1625
Total primary sludge quantity kg/d 5533.5
Concentration of primary sludge % 4
Total quantity of primary sludge m3/d
Total COD removed in biological treatment kg/d 2871.2
Total wasted bio-sludge kg/d
Concentration of wasted bio-sludge % 1.2
Total quantity of wasted bio sludge m3/d 71.78
TSS load from chemicals added in tertiary kg/d 1250
TSS load removed in tertiary treatment kg/d 1437.5
Total sludge load from tertiary kg/d 2687.5
Concentration of tertiary sludge % 2.5
Total quantity of tertiary sludge m3/d 10.75
Total quantity of combined sludge m3/d 221
Solids concentration % 3.5
Total sludge (dry wt) kg/d
Capacity of presently available filter presses kg/d 0

Required capacity for the new filter press kg/d
Say t/d
Filter Press unit

The equipment shall include filter press frame, hydraulic closing system, filtrate tray, drip
tray, polypropylene filter plates, filter cloth, automatic plate shifting device for cake
discharging, light curtain and such other fittings, devices or appurtenances necessary for a
complete operating installation.
The inlet sludge will be either Lime/Alum precipitated primary sludge or excess biological
sludge or both fed from the sludge storage tank. The feed concentration may be 3 % solids.
The solid concentration of the cake shall be at least 35 %. The percent recovery of
suspended solids shall be at least 90 %. The volume of inlet sludge will be 100 m3 per 24
hours and it shall be dewatered in 16 hours a day. The ratio of chemically precipitated
primary sludge and excess biological secondary sludge is about 5: 1. There shall be
adequate numbers of filter presses such that the standby capacity at any given time is 50 %
of the functioning numbers to dewater 100 m3 in 16 hours. The number of sludge feed
pumps shall match the number of filter presses.
The filter press frame shall be able to withstand the full static weight of the equipment
including the wet cake. The material of construction shall be in weldable structural steel
conforming to IS 2062. The frame shall be so designed as to permit an easy access to all the
parts mounted over it and still permit an easy access to all the controls mounted over it.
The frame shall be anchored into the floor with anti rusting fasteners as defined already in
this document. The frame shall be designed and constructed to withstand the slurry feed
pressure of minimum 15 kg / cm2.
The hydraulic closing system shall close the filter pack with a minimum pressure
[operating] of 380 kg / cm2 and shall be automatic. The system shall include a double
acting hydraulic cylinder, hydraulic power pack, hydraulic hoses, set point transducer with
digital LED display of minimum 5cm height of each character and tuned and set for control
of the hydraulic pressure. There shall also be a manually switcheable [ in case one of the
sensing systems is out of operation or taken out for maintenance] parallel installation using
a pressure gauge of the analog dial type of minimum readability of 600 kg / cm2 and of
minimum 100 mm dial diameter and the pressure sensing shall be of diaphragm type. Both
these shall be installed on the hydraulic cylinder itself.
The filtrate tray shall be mounted on one side of the filter press to suit the site erection and
shall be constructed in SS 04 minimum 3 mm thick with sufficient flanges for filtrate
pipeline connections.
The drip tray shall be made of SS 304 minimum 3-mm thickness/ FRP 5 mm thick with two
door overlap type to avoid filtrate dripping onto the floor and to guide the filter cake to the
cake discharge system with interlocking system, which shall be connected to the plate
shifting device.
The filter plates should be made of virgin all polypropylene resin and should be designed
and constructed to operate with a slurry pressure of 16 kg / cm2 and should be of recessed
chamber type. The filter plates shall have sufficient number of handles and filtrate drain
bibs for open filtrate discharge. The filter plates should have filter cloth holding pins.
The opening of the filter plates to discharge the filter cakes would be done manually. The
guide rail for the smooth movement of the plates shall be designed with suitable
dimensions.
All fasteners and anchor bolts shall be of such metallurgy with the use of SS fixtures in
water contact locations and hot dipped galvanized fixtures in other locations.
Filter Presses Feed Pumps
These pumps shall be of the progressive cavity type and draw the sludge from the sludge
storage tank and pump it to the dewatering equipment directly. They shall be directly
coupled to the suction piping and shall be provided with blank flanged after a double
flanged valve, so that if needed, this can be used as an auxiliary air hose point for releasing
any clogged conditions of the sludge pipe. The pumps shall be of progressive cavity type
and there shall be two pumps of which one will be working at a time and the other will be a
standby.
There shall be adequate number of pumps such that there are 50 % standby pumps over
and above the number of pumps needed to handle 100 m3 of thickened sludge in 16 hours.
The number of installed and functioning pumps shall match the number of filter press
installations such that each filter press is having a dedicated pump for itself at all times. A
delivery head that can yield an operating pressure of about 15 bar and a maximum
pressure of 18 bar is considered as required for feeding the filter press. The tenderer shall
however estimate the required delivery head and offer pumps of such delivery head as
needed by him.
The drive motor shall not exceed a speed of 1400 rpm and shall be close coupled with the
pump impeller It shall be wired for 415 volts, 50 cycles, and three-phase service and shall
be totally enclosed, oil cooled, rated for severe chemical duty with a minimum service
factor of 1: 1.5. All motor frame parting surfaces shall be deep registered and properly
sealed. The voltage, speed, insulation class, amperage, and the manufacturer’s name and
address shall be steel stamped and permanently marked on the nameplate in non-
corrodible nameplate securely fitted onto the motor frame. The required speed reduction
shall be attained by the use of an on-line gearbox foot mounted on its casing and its rotating
axis being horizontal to align with the rotor on one side and the motor on the other side.
The material of the gearbox casing shall be of cast iron IS 210 Grade 30. The material of the
gears shall be C 40 with hardening. The free end of the motor shall be securely fitted onto a
rest plate to avoid counter hung pressure on the coupling between the rotor shaft and the
motor shaft. The coupling shall be of the “Lovejoy” variety and no other m types shall be
allowed.
The rotor shall be of an extremely coarse pitch threaded screw with a deep thread and a
narrow core. The material shall be SS 316 and chrome coating and its cross section is
permitted to be hollow as long as the factor of safety is a minimum of 1: 1.5 over the
maximum load conditions anticipated in the design of the rotor for the given duty. It shall
be possible to rework the rotor.
The stator shall be of soft material and nitrile rubber is considered adequate under Indian
conditions. It shall be firmly securely sleeved into the barrel of the pump and shall be
securely in place with integral rubber seals on both the inlet and outlet ends. The seals
shall be able to withstand the unidirectional thrust imparted by the mass of sludge being
displaced thorough the impeller.
The stator and rotor shall be custom designed to permit the passage of at least a 50-mm
diameter soft solid and shall be freely displaced without disfigurement on testing at factory
before acceptance.
The shaft sealing shall be preferably attained by mechanical seals to ensure higher
reliability in this important location.
All fasteners in direct contact with the throughput shall be of SS 304 and all others shall be
of hot dipped galvanized steel.
Tertiary treatment
Name of the item Tertiary Treatment.
Design Capacity 60 m3/h
Major Components (1) Chemical Oxidation Dosing unit

Proposed (2) Multi Grade Filter
(3) Activated Carbon Filter.
Justification (1) During winter, the biological treatment system does not
operate properly resulting in effluent not meeting the
standards.
(2) Accordingly, a chemical oxidation system has been proposed.
(3) The filters help to reduce the suspended solids and residual
organics in effluent.
If upgradation
Benefit (1) Complyingwith discharge standards at all time of the year.

(2) The treated effluent will be clearer and less turbid.
Measurable Output (1) Chemical Oxidation system along with MGF andACF
In order to make sure that a reasonably good treatment is ensured during the winter too, it
is proposed to install a tertiary treatment system. It could include the following stages:
 Chemical oxidation of the treated effluent using hydrogen peroxide or bleach liquor. A
closed tank with arrangements for venturi distribution of the chemical and a slow
speed contact mixer could be considered. The tank can have three compartments, the
third compartment serving as the feed sump for the MGF. The oxidation system should
be complete with oxidation agent stock vessel, preparation of unit and monitoring
arrangement.
 A multi-grade filter (MGF) to filter out the suspended solids in the treated effluent after
oxidation. The unit should have feed pumps, backwash arrangements, air scouring,
pressure gauges etc.
 An activated carbon filters (ACF) to adsorb any residual organics, chlorine etc. The unit
should have feed pumps, arrangements for re-fill of activated carbon, backwash
arrangements, air scouring, pressure gauges etc.
The ACF filter system setup may have activated carbon of the following characteristics:
Iodine Value : 950 mg/g

Moisture : 2% (wt/wt)
Effective size : 0.55 mm – 0.75 mm
Apparent density : 0.5 g/cc
Water extractables : < 1%
Uniformity coefficient (max) : 1.9
Abrasion number (min) : 75
The filtrate from the ACF could be discharged as treated effluent. During the summer
months, when the biological system works satisfactorily, the tertiary treatment units may
be bypassed.
Tertiary treatment-Oxidation tank
Capacity 60 m3/h
Retention time 20 min
Tank volume 4mx4mx2m
Mixer Ventury mixer with dozer
Oxidation chemical dosing tank 500 lit, Sintex
Dosing system Dosing pump with outlet to ventury
mixer
Pressure 1 kg/cm2
Quantity 1 Nos.
Tertiary treatment-Mulitgrade filter

Capacity 60 m3/h
Dimensions 2 m dia x 2.2 m HOS
Vessel material of construction (MoC) Mild Steel Rubber Lined (MSRL)
Pressure 4 kg/cm2
Media layers Anthracite
1.4-1.6 mm Sand 0.4-0.6
mm, Sand 1.0-2.0 mm Gravel
2.0 - 3.15 mm, Gravel 3.15 - 5.6 mm
Make Ion Exchange/Thermax/Eqvt/
Backwash Automatic, pressure drop @1.5 kg/cm2
Control Multiport valve.
Quantity 1 No.
Tertiary treatment-Activated Carbon filter
Capacity 60 m3/h
Dimensions 2 m dia x 2.2 m HOS
Vessel material of construction (MoC) Mild Steel Rubber Lined (MSRL)
Pressure 4 kg/cm2
Media layers Granulated activated carbon 0.8-2.5
mm, supported by sieves on top and
bottom
Make Ion Exchange/Thermax/Eqvt/
Backwash Automatic, pressure drop @1.5 kg/cm2
Control Multiport valve.
Quantity 1 No.
Repair and refurbishing of sludge drying beds including media re-filling.
Though mechanical dewatering of sludge is proposed, it would be better to refurbish the

sludge drying beds and keep the same as reserve for any break down etc. in the filter press.
It can also offer a cheaper dewatering option to filter press during favorable weather
conditions.
In case it is decided to establish the CETP module II adjacent to the sludge drying beds, it
may be possible that some of the beds may need to be demolished (to accommodate the
new aeration tanks). Hence the refurbishing may be needed only in the rest of the beds.
The refurbishing of SDBs involve removal of any sludge, removal of media, washing and
desilting of any re-usable media, flushing of filtrate lines, replacement of any mesh over the
filtrate pipes, topping up of media as needed and re-alignment of feed pipes.
Provision to dose anti-foaming agent in aeration tank to prevent foaming.
Name of the item Anti-foaming unit
Design Capacity --
Major Components (1) Portable antifoaming agent dosing system consisting of

Proposed antifoam stock solution tank, portable pump and spray
nozzle
Justification (1) At present, the aeration tanks have lot of foaming.
(2) The foaming reduces efficiency of aeration besides giving
nuisance to surrounding areas when it is carried over by
wind.
If upgradation
Benefit (1) Better efficiency in aeration tanks.

(2) Prevention of nuisance due to drifting of foam in wind.
(3) Better monitoring of aeration process
Measurable Output (1) Antifoaming unit.
Since the aeration tanks have lot of foaming, it is proposed to have a portable antifoaming
agent (silicone based) dosing system consisting of antifoam stock solution tank, portable
(preferably operating in re-chargeable battery) pump and spray nozzle (to spray liquid at
droplet size of 500-600 micron size) and long nozzle pipe. The unit may be used as and
when needed and otherwise stored safely in the store.
Additional power back up (DG) and general improvement in electrical works

Name of the item Diesel Generators
Design Capacity 110 KVA, 2 Nos.
Major Components (1) 2 No. 110 KVA Diesel Generators with fuel tank and panels
Proposed
Justification (1) After the upgradation of CETP the production capacity will
be 1100 KLD from the current restricted 300 KLD and
thereby the energy requirement also will be increased
from current demand of 200 KVA to 400 KVA
(2) Outages due to weather related reasons and shortfall in
demand due to less production, Unplanned disturbances,
typically on the power lines and wires, are what cause most
blackouts.
(3) Accordingly,it is proposed to install additional 110
KVAGenerator of 2nos.
If upgradation --
Benefit (1) Uninterrupted supply of power ensuring trouble free

operation of the CETP.
Measurable Output (1) 110KVA DG- 2nos.
(2) Running Hours and Outages
During the visit, it was noted that some of the electrical controls are in broken condition
and many cables were in need of replacement/re-alignment. Panel boxes too needed
repairs. These works should be taken up simultaneous with the upgradation of the CETP.
It is also required to augment capacity/to provide DG sets as emergency back up and this
can be made common for both module -1 & 2 for the CETP. As such 2 units of 110 kVA DG
sets should suffice for both the existing and new modules of the CETP.
Table 1.7 Technical specifications of DG set engines

Rated Speed rpm : 1500
Method of aspiration : Turbocharged after cooled
Method of engine cooling : Radiator Cooled
Method of engine starting : With Electric Starter Motor operated by 24 V
batteries.
Engine duty : Standby Operation
Instruments & Safety Devices : As indicated in Technical Specifications.
Type of Silencer : Residential

Engine performance : As per BS – 5514.
Table 2.8 Technical specifications of DG set alternator

Make : Stamford, Leroy - Somer, AVKC,
MARATHON
Rated Output KVA : 110 KVA
Rated Voltage & Frequency : 415 Volts 50 Hz
No. of Phases : Three
Type of Excitation : Brushless Self Excitation
Class of Insulation : F
Degree of Protection : IP 23
Table 2.9 Preferred makes of DG components

# Item Make
1 Engine : Caterpillar / Kirloskar Cummins / FG Wilson /

Volvo
2 Alternator : Stamford / Leroy-Somer /AVKC / MARATHON

3 ACBs, MCCBs & FSUs : Siemens, Schneider, ABB
4 Contactors & Relays : Siemens / L & T / GEC Alstom / Easun Reyrolle/

Telemechanic
5 Electrical Digital Meters : Conserv / Socomac / Rishab
6 Push Button / Selector : L & T / Tecknic / Salzer / Kaycee

Switches
On-site training for the ETP in-charge in a tannery CETP in Chennai
Though the CETP incharge appeared to be motivated enough, a hands on-training for
management, maintenance and monitoring aspects of the CETP would be quite beneficial
and a one-week training for the Plant Manager in any of the well operational CETPs
(Ranitec CETP, Ranipet could be a good option) may be carried out.The Plant Manager
could also be given training in data collection, log sheet maintenance and data analysis
during the training process.
Painting and finishing of the entire CETP.

Simultaneous with the upgradation, the entire CETP may be cleaned and all structures
should be painted new. The buildings, particularly the chemical house, need colour wash.
During the painting works, it would be useful to provide colour coding to various pipelines
to facilitate its easy identification.
Improvement of laboratory
Design Capacity N.A

(1) Complete laboratory set up.
Major Components
Proposed (2) Major instrument needed include, pH Meter portable, Vacuum
Pump, BOD Incubator, TDS Meter Portable, Compound
Microscope, Turbidity Meter portable etc.
(3) Complete range of glass wares, reagents, lab furniture,
computer & other equipment.
Justification (1) Control of all the processes used in waste water treatment is
an important part of ensuring good water quality. Good
control allows a process to be optimized. As a result, excessive
dosing can be avoided, any carry-over of chemicals may be
reduced, chemical costs are minimized, and problems become
easier to solve
(2) Therefore, good process control monitoring is needed to keep
the process operating correctly and optimally. These process
control tests contrast with regulatory tests that produce data
to demonstrate compliance also.
(3) Hence it is proposed to modernize and upgrade the existing
Laboratory with the state of the Art equipment to monitor and
correct the operations of the plant in line with the preset
requirements.
(4) Testing of treatment chemicals and linking the payment of the
same with its quality will improve the treatment efficiency
and optimize the cost.
Type of intervention Upgradation of existing
If upgradation Technology
(1) Better Monitoring of the treatment process.

Benefit
(2) Instant corrective action during shortfall
(3) Overall process improvement.
(4) Monitoring of quality control of treatment chemicals used and
payment based on actual quality of chemicals.
Measurable Output (1) Complete laboratory with facilities to carry out all relevant
testing of effluent, recovered water and treatment
chemicals.
(2) Efficient monitoring of stage wise operational efficiency of
the plant at various stages.
As such the laboratory is provided with the equipment needed for the basic effluent
analysis and has testing facilities for pH, TSS and COD. Improvement neededhere would be
some additional equipment listed below training to the lab personnel for optimum
monitoring practices and record maintenance.
# Major new lab equipment needed
1. Hot air oven
2. pH Meter portable
3. Vacuum Pump
4. Muffle furnace
5. Electronic Balance
6. COD portable tester
Besides the above, the laboratory needs to be upgraded with a complete range glassware,
instruments, laboratory furniture, reagents, computers and accessories.
The upgraded lab will able to carry out all routine effluent analysis and testing of treatment
chemicals.
Expected output from upgraded CETP
The upgraded CETP is expected to meet the prescribed norms for the treated effluent
which is provided in the following Table 2.
Table 2.10 : Prescribed standards for treated effluent from IGC CETP
Parameters Expected Effluent quality

pH 6.5 – 9.0
BOD (3 days, 27 oC) <30 mg/l
COD <250 mg/l
Suspended solids <100 mg/l
Sulphide (as S) <1 mg/l
Total Chromium <2 mg/l
Oil and grease <10 mg/l
Note:
 No tannery specific standards could be seen in the J & K PCB files. Information sought from
website (http://ercmp.nic.in/Documents/GenEnvStandard.pdf) is used here.
 The treatment system recommended does not remove the Total dissolved Solids (TDS)
which could be done only though very costly technologies such as Reverse Osmosis/
Additional CETP module
Need for additional module
At present, the existing CETP treats bout 300 m3/d effluent from only three tanneries
operational at present and some effluent from other units such as Dairy and bone crushing
industries. Two tanneries are at an advanced stage of commissioning. A total of 13
tanneries are expected to be operating in the IGC, Lassipora and when all these tanneries
start operating, the discharge of effluent would exceed the design capacity of the CETP.
Further, when the CFC gets operational, the tanneries carrying out the finishing operations
at CFC will have to establish facilities for wet finishing operations inside their tanneries and
as a general rule, when a tannery extends its production from the raw to wet blue stage to
the finishing operations, the effluent volume is nearly doubled. Some small volume of
effluent may come from the CFC too. It is estimated that an additional 500 m3/d of effluent
could be expected when these developments are completed.
Proposed system
It is proposed to have a new CETP module of similar treatment scheme as that of the
existing CETP for the additional quantity. The same could be established either on the
front side (closer to the road) or on the other side (near to sludge drying beds, which may
also necessitate demolition of some of the sludge drying beds), keeping the chemical house,
office/lab and the proposed filter house as common units.
The following units are envisaged:
 New collection lines from CFC and tanneries where the presently installed collection
lines do not have adequate carrying capacity.
 Modification in the inlet effluent channel to the equalization tank of module -1 with a
distribution chamber for distribution of effluent to modules 1 and 2.
 The new CETP modulemay have the same layout as per module I.
 The treated effluent from the CETP modules should conform to the tannery effluent
discharge standards set out by JKPCB, except for dissolved solids.
 The new module will have capacity of 500m3/d.
Details of the proposed CETP module
The following will be main components of the CETP module II:
New effluent transportation system

Name of the item HDPE 4 kg/cm2 additional gravity/pumping line.
Design Capacity 2.7KMs HDPE pipeline, 75 nos manhole.

Major Components 1) 2.7kmHDPE 4 kg/cm2 gravity line.
Proposed (1) 17nos , RCC Manholes.
Justification (1) Wastewater generated in proposed CFC and new tanneries

will be Connected to CETP’s Second Module, for this a new
collection system is proposed.
(2) Based on past experiences, the new system is proposed with
HDPE pipeline and RCC manhole.
Category Upgradation of CETP –Collection
If upgradation -
Benefit (1) Infiltration of ground water is reduced.

(2) Since friction factor is less for HDPE pipeline, less chocking
will occur.
Measurable Output (1) HDPE pipeline of 2.7Kms
(2) 17Nos of Manhole in RCC
The gravity conveyance should be designed by using the minimum design criteria as
provided in the following Table 2.24.
Table 2.11: Minimum design criteria for gravity conveyance system
# Description Details
1. Distance between manholes 25 m
2. Type of pipes used High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipe
having a pressure rating (working
pressure) at 27oC is 0.4 MPa (or) 4
kg/cm2
3. Manning’s coefficient of 0.011
roughness (n)
4. Desired actual velocity 0.65 m/s
(minimum)
5. Maximum depth of flow at actual 80% of the inner diameter of the HDPE
flow condition pipe
6. Level difference at each manhole 0.03
CETP module II
Effluent channel: The inlet channel and the distribution arrangement shall be done in such
a manner thatit can facilitate distribution of effluent to CETP modules I and II or channel
the effluent only to one module as per the requirement. As mentioned in the section related
to CETP upgradation, the screen to be installed in the inlet channel can be common to both
CETP modules.
Raw Effluent Pump :
The raw effluent pumps shall be self priming non-clog centrifugal pump and shall be
installed in two numbers one working and one standby.
The pump shall be capable of delivering 50 m3/hour at 10 m head at the best efficiency
point of the chosen pump curve. The pumps are supposed to operate continuously for 24
hours non stop and should be capable of handling of solids upto 40 mm.
The drive motor shall be directly coupled with the pump impeller or monobloc
construction. It shall be wired for 415 volts, 50 cycles, and three-phase service and shall be
totally enclosed, fan cooled. All motor frame parting surfaces shall be deep registered and
properly sealed. The voltage, speed, insulation class, amperage, and the manufacturer’s
name and address shall be steel stamped and permanently marked on the nameplate in
non-corridible nameplate securely fitted onto the motor frame.
The impeller shall be of the closed/semi open impeller type. The impeller shall be duly
dynamically balanced and finished.
The material of the casing shall be in high-grade cast iron. The material of the impeller shall
be Stainless steel 304 grade. The material of the shaft shall be stainless steel. The pumps
are needed to be installed in a small pump house with adequate room for personnel
movement. The approximate dimensions of the room would be 3 m x 3 m.
Equalization tank:
Design Capacity 14 m dia x 3.1 LD
Major Components Equalization tank, Submersible mixers- 2nos

Proposed
Justification 1. Wastewater received from different member units have

different characteristic, to unite all these characteristic a
Equalization tank is proposed.
2. It also balances the flow, maintaining steady flow rates
over 20 h/d for the subsequent treatment units.
If upgradation
Benefit 1. To maintain desired flow

2. Homogeneous Mixing
3. To handle peak flow
Measurable Output Equalization tank with 2nos of submersible mixers.
The equalization tank is a circular tank, constructed in RCC, similar to the existing
equalization tank. The tank is provided with submersible mixers with lifting arrangement.
Equalization Tank& Mixer
Size of tank 14 m dia x 3.1 LD x FB as per site condition
Type of tank Circular
Mixing Equipment Submersible Mixer
MOC of Mixer SS
MOC of Motor housing SS
Power rating 1 kW
Make ABS / Grundfos / Eqvt.
Quantity 2 Nos.
Civil work RCC tank 14 m dia x 3.1m liquid depth, 0.5 m free board
specification
Equipment Submersible Submersible mixers, propeller with three back-

specification mixer, 2 swept, clog resistant, high efficiency non-corrosive
numbers stainless steel blades, long life two independently
working shaft seals, nominal thrust with Class H
insulation, with vortex shield, seal failure sensing
arrangement, necessary spares for one year
operation complete with lifting arrangement and
other standard features
Equalized Raw effluent transfer pumps: Supply, erection and

effluent commissioning of 30 m3/h, submersible pumps, 12
transfer m, ND 110 mm, with body of protective coating to
pumps, 2 resist corrosion complete with motor, suspension
numbers device and other accessories
Piping HDPE From receiving sump to equalization tank, 200 mm

OD from equalization to flash mixer
Electrical Mixers and Panels, push button remote switches and electrical
pump and earthing cables
Instrumentation Level switches, Level switches – 2 numbers for equalization tank

pressure
Pressure switches - 2 numbers
switches and
electromagnetic Electromagnetic flow meter – 1 number, 110 mm
flow meter dia to suit the delivery pipeline of equalized effluent
The wastewater is pumped into the flash mixer tank where lime and alum are dosed. By
using a culvert mixing occurs. The flash mixer is used for additional mixing. By gravity the
wastewater enters the flocculation tank, where anionic PE is dosed. The chemical
preparation and dosing units for lime, aluminum sulphate (alum) and anionic PE are
located in the chemical house.
Chemical preparation and mixing tank:
Name Chemical preparation and mixing tank
Design Capacity 500 m3/d
Major Components Flocculation unit, Dosing system, chemical house.

Proposed
Justification 1. To facilitate primary treatment, viz., coagulation and

flocculation.
2. To maintain pH level
Type of intervention New/
If upgradation
Benefit 1. Solid-Liquid Separation through coagulation and

flocculation.
2. Maintaining desired pH
3. Colloidal suspended solids can be settled in lesser retention
time.
4. Precipitation of chromium and some portion of organics.
Measurable Output 1. Flocculation unit

2. Dosing System
3. Suspended solids reduction.
Flocculation tank:
The flocculation tank is also equipped with a culvert to optimize the mixing. From here on
the wastewater enters the open feed channel (top feed) towards the primary clarifier.
Flash Mixer Mechanism
Flash mixer 1 m x 1 m x 1.25 m LD + 0.5 m FB
Mechanism size 1.0m x 1.0m x 1.2 m LD + 0.5m FB
MOC SS
Type Turbine
Power 0.5 kW
Make Supplier fabricated.
Quantity 1 No.
Flocculator mechanism
Flocculator 1.5 m x 1.5 m x 1.0 m LD + 0.5 m FB

Size 1.5 m x 1.5 m x 1.0m LD + 0.3m FB
MOC SS
Type Paddle
Power 0.5 kW
Quantity 1 no.
Lime tank & agitator
Tank Size 1 m x 1 m x 1.25 m +0.3 m FB
MOC SS
Type Turbine
Power 0.5 kW
Quantity 1 nos.
Lime dosing pump
Pressure 1.0 kg/cm2
MOC of Body SS
MOC of Impeller SS
MOC of Shaft SS
Type Centrifugal / metering
Suction type Positive
Make Johnson/ KSB / Eqvt.
Quantity 2 Nos. (1W+l S)

Alum tank agitator
MOC SS
Type Turbine
Power 0.5 kW
Quantity 1 nos.
Alum dosing pump
Pressure 1.0 kg/cm2
MOC SS
Poly tank agitator
MOC SS
Type Turbine
Power 0.5 kW
Quantity 1 nos.
Poly dosing pump
Capacity 5 - 15 LPH
Pressure 1.0 kg/cm2

MOC SS
Phosphate tank agitator
MOC SS
Type Turbine
Power 0.5 kW
Quantity 1 nos.
Phosphate dosing pump
Capacity 10 -20 LPH
Pressure 1.0 kg/cm2
MOC SS
Agitators for Chemical Preparation Tanks – Lime/Alum/Poly
The equipment shall include drive motor, coupling, turbine impeller assembly,
The Lime requirement has been estimated at 200 gm/ m3 for a flow of 1 mld spread
uniformly through the day and night and another 1 g/l dosage to the 0.1 mld of sludge. The
Lime solution is expected to be prepared with commercial Lime at purity of 85 % available
Lime as Calcium Hydroxide with a variation in purity of plus or minus 5 %. The strength of
Lime solution shall be taken as 10 %. The volume of the Lime solution tank is planned to
hold at any time the requirement for 8 hours of feed solution. This calculates to around
1000 liters capacity for the Lime preparation tank. Two such tanks will be provided by the
civil works contractor. The agitator equipments for both the tanks shall be provided by the
tenderer. The idea is to keep one tank in the solution preparation mode while the other
tank will be used in the feeding mode. The tip velocity of the turbine shall be minimum 3
m/s, and the minimum velocity gradient ensured at 300mps/m depth when the
appropriate specific gravity of the solution is taken into account.
The agitator drive unit shall be mounted such that the motor is mounted vertically on to a
helical gearbox, which transmits the incoming energy and outgoing energy in the same
vertical nature except that the axis of rotation of these two shall be different. These shall be
mounted at the floor level of the first floor. This will give an idea for the tenderer towards
the length of the shaft of the impeller required under the contract. The floor area at the first
floor near the agitator shall also have a basket sunk into the agitator tank to reach 50 cm
into the liquid elevation with perforations at the bottom and shall be provided by the civil
works contractor in concrete.
The drive motor shall not exceed a rpm of 1500 and shall be directly coupled with the gear
reducer. It shall be wired for 415 volts, 50 cycles, and three-phase service and shall be
totally enclosed, fan cooled, rated for severe chemical duty with a minimum service factor
of 1: 1.5. All motor frame parting surfaces shall be deep registered and properly sealed. The
voltage, speed, insulation class, amperage, and the manufacturer’s name and address shall
be steel stamped and permanently marked on the nameplate in non-corrodible nameplate
securely fitted onto the motor frame.
The rotary speed of the impeller shall not exceed 100 rpm.
The drive motor output shaft and the impeller rotary shaft shall be connected by a direct
coupling. The coupling shall be able to withstand continuous duty with occasional upward
thrusts resulting from excess dumping of Lime powder and the torque shall provide for a
safety factor of 1 : 2 over the dynamic loading. The drive assembly for each agitator shall
consist of a suitable drive motor, directly coupled to a helical gearbox. The Gear reducer
shall be heavy duty, high efficiency type with a rugged housing and shall have a minimum
service factor of 2.0 and suitable for 24 hours continuous service. The gear reducer shall
have oil bath lubrication and dry well construction on the vertical output shaft to prevent
leakage of lubricant. The casing of the gear reducer shall be of CI and the gears shall be
hardened and ground for precision.
The circulating element of each agitator will consist of a single, axial flow design, 4 inclined
blade impeller. The inclined SS304 blades shall be bolted to the center Hub. The impeller
assembly will be securely keyed to the shaft. Each impeller shaft shall be SS304 solid shaft
of suitable diameter designed to resist the applied radial and axial thrust loads. Reinforced
flanges at both ends will be used to attach the impeller at the bottom and to the rigid drive
coupling at the top. All fasteners used in the assembly will be of SS 304. The rotating shaft is
best designed as a tubular structure for better torque resistance.
The unsupported length of the agitator rotary shaft shall not exceed 50 cm at any vertical
location. The required safety bearing housings / plummer blocks shall be provided by
extending the mechanical members from the gearbox bottom mounting and clamping the
bearings inside them. The mechanical members of such provisions shall be made of SS 304
and accordingly erected.
The minimum required mixing power shall be provided at 100 watts per cum of tank
contents.
The walkway shall be the peripheral area of 1-m width around the tanks. The flooring shall
be with grating in MSEP and be of the square mesh type with a rise of minimum 25 mm
above the floor and the clear openings of 25 mm square and all members of minimum 6
mm thickness. The entire walkway shall be provided in such number of radial assemblies of
each not exceeding 25-kg in weight to permit easy removal and re-fixing. The tenderer
shall upon award of the contract interact with the civil contractor to obtain a suitable
recess in the floor to house the above grating without slippages.
Dosing pumps – Lime & Alum
The Alum and Lime solution from the Alum/Lime solution preparation tanks shall be
pumped by the use of dosing pumps to the flash mixer to be added to the raw effluent after
screening and equalisation.
These pumps shall be capable of pumping the 10 % Alum/ Lime solution calculated on the
basis of 200 mg/l and of 100 % Lime and actual available Lime of only 80 % and alum at
85% with 12% alumina content. In addition, another quantity of 1 g/l for 80 m3 /d of
sludge need to be dosed to the sludge storage tank. This requires a Lime solution pump
capable of pumping 15 liters per minute uniformly through the 24 hours. The pumps shall
be able to pump the Lime solution from the ground floor level to the flash mixer, which
shall have its operating water level at minimum of 4 m above ground level. Thus, the static
head shall be 4 m in the worst case plus a friction head of say 2m. The total head required
shall thus be taken as 8 m for design purposes. There shall be two pumps of which one shall
be working and the other standby at any time. These shall permit manual override and
variable flow control at both sides of the chosen median duty point for the duty already
stated herein. These shall be able to handle a flow variation of plus or minus 25 % of the
stated flow and at a head of not less than 7m at the highest flow. The construction shall be
totally enclosed corrosion proof type. The liquid end shall be in SS 316. The body shall be of
lightweight Aluminium Alloy. The drive motor shall be of fire proof and explosion proof
construction. The turndown ratio shall be 10 : 1 with a tolerance of (-) 5 % to (+) 10 %. The
variable setting shall be achieved by variable speed drive or electronic capacitance control.
The pump erection shall provide for a thrust block against alignment slippages. The
repeatability shall be within 5 % on both sides of the duty point.
Polyelectrolyte Dosing Pumps
The polyelectrolyte solution from the Polyelectrolyte solution preparation tanks shall be
pumped by the use of Polyelectrolyte solution dosing pumps to the flash mixer where Alum
solution and Lime solution will also be added to the raw effluent after screening.
These pumps shall be capable of pumping the 1 % Polyelectrolyte solution calculated on

the basis of 2.5 mg/l of 100 % liquid Polyelectrolyte. The actual dosage needed for his
equipment can be met by a pump duty of 20 liters per hour. The pumps shall be able to
pump the Lime solution from the ground floor level to the flash mixer, which shall have its
operating water level at minimum of 4 m above ground level. Thus, the static head shall be
4 m in the worst case plus a friction head of say 2m. The total head required shall thus be
taken as 8 m for design purposes. There shall be two pumps of which one shall be working
and the other standby at any time.
These shall be of the electromechanical type. They shall have a mechanically actuated
diaphragm with high precision finished balls and seats for reliable sealing. These shall
permit manual override and variable flow control at both sides of the chosen median duty
point for the duty already stated herein. These shall be able to handle a flow variation of
plus or minus 25 % of the stated flow and at a head of not less than 7m at the highest flow.
The construction shall be totally enclosed corrosion proof type. The liquid end shall be in
SS 316. The body shall be of lightweight Aluminium Alloy. The drive motor shall be of fire
proof and explosion proof construction. The turndown ratio shall be 10: 1 with a tolerance
of (-) 5 % to (+) 10 %. The variable setting shall be achieved by variable speed drive or
electronic capacitance control. The pump erection shall provide for a thrust block against
alignment slippages. The repeatability shall be within 5 % on both sides of the duty point.
The equipment shall include drive motor, direct coupling, turbine impeller assembly,
Primary clarifier:
Name Primary Clarifier
Design Capacity 4.5 m dia x 2.5 m SWD
Major Components Primary Clarifier with mechanism

Proposed
Justification (1) To make the colloidal suspended to settle under

gravity after chemical dosing, a new clarifier is
proposed.
(2) The sludge will be thickened by gravity in the bottom
to extract the same in a dewaterable concentration.
If upgradation
Benefit (1) Since a part of organic solids is removed as sludge,

the loading to aeration tank will be consistent.
(2) Removal of organics reduces the power cost to run
blowers for maintaining DO.
(3) Removal of heavy metals and colour is done in
primary.
Measurable Output (1) A new primary clarifier with mechanism

(2) Reduction in TSS, Chromium, BOD and COD level.
The wastewater enters the primary clarifier by top feed. The tank is equipped with a fixed
static bridge, equipped with a rotating bottom scraper and a floating layer removal
mechanism. The effluent leaves the tank by a circular V-notch weir.
Primary Clarifier Tank & Mechanism

Tank Size 4.5 m dia x 2.5 m SWD
Construction RCC, M 20
MOC Feed well FRP
MOC of underwater parts SS
Bridge RCC
Power 0.5 kW
Quantity 1 no.
There shall be one primary clarifier mechanism suitable for installation in concrete tank
7.5 m internal diameter x 2-m side water depth having inward slopping hopper floor with 1
vertical to 12 horizontal slope. The mechanism shall be of the center drive type with a
torque of not less than 2500 m-kg and shall be supported on an RCC influent column with
unit, lifting mechanism for raising sludge scraper assembly, feed well, center cage, sludge
removal rake arms with sweeper blades & squeegees, two numbers scum skimmers with
respective scum boxes, weirs, baffles, walkway with handrails, anchor bolts and such other
fittings, devices or appurtenances as are necessary for a complete operating installation. It
is quite likely that there may be instances wherein, the sludge may bet accumulated at the
floor of the clarifier to a height that would impose a torque higher than the drive rated
torque for the equipment. In such situations, it is proposed to lift the entire suspended cage
and sludge scraper assembly and the scum scraper assembly clear of the floor in
increments up to a maximum of 30 cm, such that there will be continued sludge removal
and progressively better control on getting over the accumulated sludge situation. Such
lifting is desired to be achieved by an electromechanical control provided with a manual
override.
instantaneous peaking of close to plus or minus 5 %. The inlet BOD and SS are to be taken
as 2000 mg/l and 4000 mg/l respectively. The dosage of chemicals to this primary clarifier
is from an upstream flash mixer and flocculator. The chemical dosages are computed as
Lime 200 gm/ m3; Aluminium Sulphate 200 gm/m3; Anionic polyelectrolyte 2.5 gm/m3.
The BOD reduction is 50 % and the SS reduction is 80%.
The drive assembly for each clarifier shall consist of a drive motor, helical gear box, steel
roller chain drive, turntable type worm gear assembly, visual torque indicator, overload
alarm and cut off actuating system. The drive motor shall be of the TEFC type suitable for
operation in standard commercially available 3 phase, 50 cycle, 415 volts supply with its
inherent variations in voltage and / or frequency. The power transmission between the
first reducer and the worm gear assembly shall be through a chain and sprocket drive,
which shall be enclosed in a fiberglass chain guard. The worm gear assembly shall consist
of a case hardened and ground alloy steel worm (EN353/equv hardness 50-52 Rc) and Cast
Iron worm wheel (IS: 210 grade FG260), all placed within a graded cast iron housing (IS:
210 grade FG200) complete with oil fill, level and drain fittings. The turntable base shall be
made of cast Iron (IS: 210 grade FG200. The worm gear shall be running on a built-up large
diameter precision bearing assembly consisting of high chrome alloy steel bearing balls
(AFBMA Gr 500, 62-65 RC) and four replaceable hardened alloy steel inserts (AISI
4140/equivalent 36- 38 Rc final Hardness) pressed into the annular grooves in the gear
and turntable base all running in an oil bath. The base will have provision for dust seal and
complete with oil fill, level and drain fittings. All gears and bearings shall run in an oil bath.
Readily accessible lubricant fill and drainpipes with necessary fittings shall be provided.
The drive worm shaft shall be free to move horizontally within the limits afforded by a
calibrated compression spring at the thrust end. The worm shaft movement shall be
transmitted to the drive control by a pin contacting the cam support and camshaft, thereby
actuating the pointer. The pointer shall indicate relative torque load on a 0 to 100%
graduated scale. Four cams and limit switches shall be included. Cams shall be
independently adjustable over the full torque range. The limit switches shall be shop-
adjusted to sound an alarm, and stop the drive motor at predetermined torque settings.
Switches and cams shall be mounted in a weatherproof steel box having conduit terminal
strips. The drive shall be designed for a duty rated torque of 2500 Kg-M with the main gear
and pinion set designed for a yield torque of at least four times the duty rated torque. The
drive main bearing shall be designed for a B10 bearing life of minimum 20 years with
continuous operation & full total rotating mechanism weight.
shall consist of Stainless Steel 304 grating type floor plate with necessary structural steel
stiffeners and supports, resting on the center assembly, and provided with connections to
the walkway. The platform shall be surrounded by handrails 1000 mm high.
There shall be a fixed feed well and it shall be hung from the bridge superstructure. The
inlet feed pipe which is brought from the periphery of the clarifier and supported from the
bridge superstructure will empty out in to the feed well. The diameter of the feed well shall
be between 22% to 25% of the diameter of the clarifier so as to limit the downward
velocity calculated on full plan area of the feed well not exceeding 1.5 m / sec. The
immersed depth of the feed well shall be between 55 % to 65 % of the side water depth of
the clarifier. The material of the feed well and all fixtures either partly or wholly exposed to
atmosphere or fully submerged shall all be of MS FRP/epoxy coated. The thickness of the
feed well shall not be less than 8 mm.
A steel adapter shaft will connect to the main gear of the centre drive. The lower pipe shaft
which is attached to the adapter shaft through suitable flanged connection will support and
rotate the rake arms. The lower shaft will be of adequate size to carry the applied torque
and bending loads. Steel fitments are provided in the pipe shaft to connect the rake arms
and cone scrapers. The centre shaft will be lined with ss316 liners so that 30 cm on
bothsides of the wastewater interface at all times including the fully lifted condition to
prevent corrosion from the waterline and propagate to the whole assembly.
The width of the full diameter bridge shall include provision for housing the lifting
mechanism. The effective width of the central walkway within the bridge shall be minimum
1m wide. Handrails shall be provided for the full width as also the width of the walkway
supported by the drive platform at the center and the tank walls at its outer end and shall
be designed to safely withstand all normal operating loads. It shall consist of two (2) side
wide flange beams of welded steel construction, with the walkway of MSEP grating floor
plate supported by the cross members. A toe plate of 150 mm height made of 3mm thick SS
304 sheet shall be provided on both the running edges. The height of protective hand
railing & piping shall be 1100 mm from walkway upto the top row of piping and the steel
member supporting this piping shall not project for more than 10 cm above this level and
shall be finished with levelled edges. The piping shall be in three rows of MSEP 32 NB size
thick-walled and vertically spaced at 30cm, 60cm and 90 cm from walkway elevation. The
horizontal spacing of the steel members supporting these pipes shall not exceed 1.5m
center to center. These shall be integrally welded to the steel tensile members of the bridge.
All structural steel members and fasteners used in the construction of the bridge shall be
hot dip galvanized.
steel.
Primary Sludge Transfer Pump
The sludge, settled at the tank bottom, is pumped (one standby pump) to the sludge storage
tank. The effluent flows into the aeration tank. For maintenance of the rotating scraper the
top feed to the primary clarifier can be closed. The wastewater is then directed towards the
effluent outlet of the primary clarifier. The primary clarifier is equipped with a scum box
arrangement.
Primary sludge transfer pump
Capacity 5 m3/h
Pressure 1.0 kg/cm2
MOC of body CI
MOC of Impeller SS
MOC of Shaft SS
Type Non Clog Centrifugal

These pumps shall draw the sludge from the primary settling tank and pump it to the
sludge storage tank. They shall be directly coupled to the suction piping and shall be
provided with an “All flanged T” branch opening, normally blank flanged after a double
and there shall be two pumps of which one will be working at a time and the other will be
standby.
There shall be two pumps, one working and other standby to pump approximately 10
m3/h of chemically flocculated primary sludge. The designed operating head shall be
considered as 8 m.
pump impeller through gearbox assembly. It shall be wired for 415 volts, 50 cycles, and
three-phase service and shall be totally enclosed, oil cooled, rated for severe chemical duty
with a minimum service factor of 1: 1.5. All motor frame parting surfaces shall be deep
registered and properly sealed. The voltage, speed, insulation class, amperage, and the
manufacturer’s name and address shall be steel stamped and permanently marked on the
nameplate in non-corrodible nameplate securely fitted onto the motor frame. The required
speed reduction shall be attained by the use of an on-line gearbox foot mounted on its
casing and its rotating axis being horizontal to align with the rotor on one side and the
motor on the other side. The material of the gearbox casing shall be of cast iron IS 210
Grade 30.
displaced thorough the impeller.
The stator and rotor shall be custom designed to permit the passage of at least a 50-mm
diameter soft solid and shall be freely displaced without disfigurement on testing at factory
before acceptance.
The bearings on the pump side of the extended drive shaft of the motor shall be of double
row ball bearings and shall be able to take the axial and radial loading on it. The bearings
on the drive side of the extended drive shaft of the motor shall be of large groove ball
bearings.
Biological treatment:
Name Biological Treatment

Design Capacity 500 m3, 10 m x 10 m x( 5.0 m LD + 0.5 m FB)- CAT2
5.5 m dia x 2.5 m SWD – Sec. Clarifier 3
900 m3, 10 m x 18 m x (5.0 m LD + 0.5 m FB)- EAT2
5.5 m dia x 2.5 m SWD- Sec. Clarifier 4
Major Components Aeration tank3&4, Diffusers for AT 3&4, Blowers -

Proposed 1100m3/h – 3nos for each aeration tank, Blower house.
Justification (1) For handling the additional effluent load, a new two
stage aeration system is required.
(2) The new tanks will ensure better aeration and
compliance with the standards.

If upgradation
Benefit (1) It will ensure the effluent’s BOD is less than 20mg/l
(2) It helps to comply with discharge standards.
Measurable Output (1) Aeration tank- 2nos, with all accessories, 500 m3/d.
(2) Treated effluent complying with the JK PCB
standards.
Aeration tank-1: A fine bubble diffused air aeration system is applied. The aeration tank is
laid out as a two stage system. The aeration tank-1 is of plug-flow configuration and the
aeration capacity is variable by controlling the frequency and thereby the output of the
blowers and locally adjustable by hand operated valves. The actual oxygen input can be
adapted to the actual oxygen requirements. Phosphate may be added to the influent in the
aeration tank to create the optimum BOD: P ratio. The phosphate dosing system is located
at the chemical house. From the aeration tank the treated influent overflows into the
secondary clarifier -1
Aeration Tank-1,
Capacity 500 m3, 10 m x 10 m x 5.0 m LD + 0.5 m FB
Hydraulic retention time 1 day
Inlet flow rate (including return 50 m3/h (25 m3/h + 25 m3/h)

sludge)
Tank dimensions 10 m x 10 m x 5 m + 0.5 m FB
Flow pattern Plug flow
Diffuser installation Drop pipes, dummy end for retrieval
Construction RCC M 25
Aeration blower, Tank-1
Capacity 1100 m3/h
Power 11.5 kW
MOC CI/CS
Type Twin lobe / tri lobe
Make Everest/Kay / Swam / Eqvt.
Quantity 3 nos. (2 W +1 S)
Fine bubble diffuser, Tank-1
Size 90 OD x 1000 mm long
Specific air flow rate 12 -18 m3/h
MOC of diffuser EPDM

MOC of fixing arrangement PVC
Type Tubular
Type of arrangement Retrieval
Make Envicon / EDI / Eqvt.
Quantity 1 lot
Secondary clarifier-1:
The tank is a circular tank equipped with rotating bottom scraper and floating layer
removal mechanism. The sludge settled down at the bottom, is pumped either to the
aeration tank by the sludge recirculation pumps or to the sludge storage tank by the
surplus sludge pumps. The effluent leaves the secondary clarifier by overflow and enters
Aeration tank-2.
Secondary clarifier mechanism-1
Retention time Hrs
MOC Feed well FRP
Bridge RCC
Power 0.75 kW
Quantity 1 no.
There shall be two secondary clarifier mechanisms suitable for installation in concrete tank
torque of not less than 2500 mkg and shall be supported on an RCC influent column with
unit, feed well, center cage, sludge removal rake arms with sweeper blades & squeegees,
scum skimmer, scum box, weirs, baffles, walkway with handrails, anchor bolts and such
other fittings, devices or appurtenances as are necessary for a complete operating
installation.
instantaneous peaking of close to plus or minus 5 % plus a sludge re-circulation ratio of
equal to 100 % at the maximum. The inlet BOD of the aeration tank is to be taken as 1200
mg/l and the BOD reduction in the system is 93 %. Even though conventional secondary
clarifiers need not have the scum removal provision, still, nothing precludes their
installation. Accordingly, this secondary clarifier shall have a scum removal mechanism, as
it is considered advantageous to remove floating solids, thus producing a cleaner effluent.
The bridge shall provide access to the clarifier assembly and drive control from a specific
location on the periphery of the clarifier. The clear passage width of the bridge shall be 1
m. The structure shall be made of steel. The rise and tread of steps for accessing the bridge
shall be 20 cm and 15 cm.
The drive assembly for clarifier shall consist of a drive motor, helical gear box, steel roller
chain drive, Intermediate worm gear assembly, turntable type internal spur gear, visual
torque indicator, overload alarm and cut off actuating system. The drive motor shall be of
the TEFC type suitable for operation in standard commercially available 3 phase, 50 cycle,
415 volts supply with its inherent variations in voltage and / or frequency. The power
transmission between the first reducer and the intermediate worm gear assembly shall be
through a chain and sprocket drive, which shall be enclosed in a fiberglass chain guard. The
intermediate worm gear assembly shall consist of a case hardened and ground alloy steel
worm (EN353/equv hardness 50-52 Rc) and Cast Iron worm wheel (IS: 210 grade FG260),
all placed within a graded cast iron housing (IS: 210 grade FG200) complete with oil fill,
level and drain fittings. The main pinion and pinion shaft shall be keyed to the worm gear
and is made as an integral unit from forged alloy steel (AISI 4142/Equivalent 43-44 Rc).
The main internal spur gear assembly shall be of a turntable type construction and with
internal spur gear. The turntable base shall be made of cast Iron (IS: 210 grade FG200) and
the main spur gear shall be of cast High tensile alloy steel (IS: 2644 –Gr2 240-250 BHN final
hardness). The turntable will be mounted on top of the center column and will have
positive levelling features. The spur gear shall be running on a built-up large diameter high
chrome alloy steel bearing balls (AFBMA Gr 500, 62-65 RC) and four replaceable hardened
alloy steel inserts (AISI 4140/equivalent 36- 38 Rc final Hardness) pressed into the annular
grooves in the gear and turntable base all running in an oil bath. The base will have
provision for dust seal and complete with oil fill, level and drain fittings. All gears and
bearings shall run in an oil bath. Readily accessible lubricant fill and drainpipes with
necessary fittings shall be provided. The drive worm shaft shall be free to move
horizontally within the limits afforded by a calibrated compression spring at the thrust end.
The worm shaft movement shall be transmitted to the drive control by a pin contacting the
cam support and camshaft, thereby actuating the pointer. The pointer shall indicate
relative torque load on a 0 to 100% graduated scale. Four cams and limit switches shall be
included. Cams shall be independently adjustable over the full torque range. Two limit
switches shall be shop-adjusted to sound an alarm and stop the drive motor at
predetermined torque settings. Switches and cams shall be mounted in a weatherproof
steel box having conduit terminal strips. The drive shall be designed for a duty rated torque
of 2500 Kg-M with the main gear and pinion set designed for a yield torque of at least four
times the duty rated torque. The drive main bearing shall be designed for a B10 bearing life
of minimum 20 years with continuous operation & full total rotating mechanism weight.
shall consist of Stainless Steel 304 grating type floor plate with necessary stiffeners and
supports, resting on the center assembly, and provided with connections to the walkway.
The platform shall be surrounded by handrails 1000mm high.
There shall be a fixed feed well surrounding the inlet RCC pipe and it shall be integrally
attached to the scraper drive assembly and the scum scraper assembly for uniform
movement. The diameter of the feed well shall be between 22% to 25% of the diameter of
the clarifier so as to limit the downward velocity calculated on full plan area of the feed
well not exceeding 1.5 m / sec. The immersed depth of the feed well shall be between 55 %
to 65 % of the side water depth of the clarifier. The material of the feed well and all fixtures
either partly or wholly exposed to atmosphere or fully submerged shall all be of MS
FRP/epoxy coated. The thickness of the feed well shall not be less than 8 mm.
The center cage shall be of a steel box truss construction and shall be provided with
connections for the sludge rake arms and feed well supports. It shall be bolted to the main
gear, which shall rotate the cage with the attached rake arms, and feed well. The main gear
attachment to the cage shall have provision for adjustment to ensure levelling of the cage.
Structural members as well as non structural members shall all be spliced 30 cm on both
sides of the wastewater interface with MSEP members to prevent corrosion from the
waterline and propagate to the whole assembly.
The 1.0-mtr wide walkway with handrails shall be supported by the drive platform at the
center and the tank wall at its outer end and shall be designed to safely withstand all
normal operating loads. It shall consist of two (2) side wide flange beams of welded steel
construction, with the walkway of MSEP grating floor plate supported by the cross
members. A toe plate of 150 mm height made of 6 mm thick MSEP sheet shall be provided
on both the running edges. The height of protective hand railing & piping shall be 1000 mm
from walkway upto the top row of piping and the steel member supporting this piping shall
not project for more than 10 cm above this level and shall be finished with bevelled edges.
The piping shall be in three rows of MSEP NB size thick-walled and vertically spaced at
30cm, 60cm and 90 cm from walkway elevation. The horizontal spacing of the steel
members supporting these pipes shall not exceed 1.5m center to center. These shall be
integrally welded to the steel tensile members of the bridge. All structural steel members
and fasteners used in the construction of the bridge shall be hot dip galvanized/SS 304.
steel.
Aeration tank-2:
This tank too is equipped with a fine bubble diffused air aeration system. The retention
time in the Aeration tank-2 is more than the first stage and the number of diffusers too are
more. From the aeration tank the treated influent overflows into the secondary clarifier -2.
Aeration Tank-2
Capacity 900 m3, 10 m x 18 m x 5.0 m LD + 0.5 m FB
Hydraulic retention time 1.8 days
Inlet flow rate (including return 50 m3/h (25 m3/h + 25 m3/h)

sludge)
Tank dimensions 10 m x 18 m x 5 m + 0.5 m FB
Flow pattern Plug flow
Diffuser installation Drop pipes, dummy end for retrieval
Construction RCC M 25
Aeration blower-2
Capacity 1100 m3/h
Power 11.5 kW
MOC CI/CS
Type Twin lobe / tri lobe
Make Everest/Kay / Swam / Eqvt.
Quantity 3 nos. (2 W +1 S)
Fine bubble diffuser
Size 90 OD x 1000 mm long
Specific air flow rate 12 -18 m3/h
MOC of diffuser EPDM
MOC of fixing arrangement PVC
Type Tubular
Type of arrangement Retrieval
Make Envicon / EDI / Eqvt.

Quantity 1 lot
Diffused Aeration for AT-3/4
Secondary clarifier-2:
This tank also is a circular tank equipped with rotating bottom scraper. The sludge settled
down at the bottom, is pumped either to the aeration tank by the sludge recirculation
pumps or to the sludge storage tank by the surplus sludge pumps. The effluent leaves the
secondary clarifier by overflow and flows through a pipeline by gravity to tertiary
treatment.
Secondary clarifier mechanism-2
Retention time HRT
MOC Feed well FRP
Bridge RCC
Power 0.75 kW
Quantity 1 no.
Secondary Sludge recirculation

pumps
Unit Two sets for both aeration stages.
Capacity 25 m3/h (100% recirculation)

Pressure 1.0 kg/cm2
MOC of body CI
MOC of Impeller SS
MOC of Shaft SS
Type Non Clog Centrifugal
Power 1.5 kW
There shall be two secondary clarifier mechanisms suitable for installation in concrete tank
torque of not less than 2500 mkg and shall be supported on an RCC influent column with
unit, feed well, center cage, sludge removal rake arms with sweeper blades & squeegees,
scum skimmer, scum box, weirs, baffles, walkway with handrails, anchor bolts and such
other fittings, devices or appurtenances as are necessary for a complete operating
installation.
instantaneous peaking of close to plus or minus 5 % plus a sludge re-circulation ratio of
equal to 100 % at the maximum. The inlet BOD of the aeration tank is to be taken as 1200
mg/l and the BOD reduction in the system is 93 %. Even though conventional secondary
clarifiers need not have the scum removal provision, still, nothing precludes their
installation. Accordingly, this secondary clarifier shall have a scum removal mechanism, as
it is considered advantageous to remove floating solids, thus producing a cleaner effluent.
The bridge shall provide access to the clarifier assembly and drive control from a specific
location on the periphery of the clarifier. The clear passage width of the bridge shall be 1
m. The structure shall be made of steel. The rise and tread of steps for accessing the bridge
shall be 20 cm and 15 cm.

The drive assembly for clarifier shall consist of a drive motor, helical gear box, steel roller
chain drive, Intermediate worm gear assembly, turntable type internal spur gear, visual
torque indicator, overload alarm and cut off actuating system. The drive motor shall be of
the TEFC type suitable for operation in standard commercially available 3 phase, 50 cycle,
415 volts supply with its inherent variations in voltage and / or frequency. The power
transmission between the first reducer and the intermediate worm gear assembly shall be
through a chain and sprocket drive, which shall be enclosed in a fiberglass chain guard. The
intermediate worm gear assembly shall consist of a case hardened and ground alloy steel
worm (EN353/equv hardness 50-52 Rc) and Cast Iron worm wheel (IS: 210 grade FG260),
all placed within a graded cast iron housing (IS: 210 grade FG200) complete with oil fill,
level and drain fittings. The main pinion and pinion shaft shall be keyed to the worm gear
and is made as an integral unit from forged alloy steel (AISI 4142/Equivalent 43-44 Rc).
The main internal spur gear assembly shall be of a turntable type construction and with
internal spur gear. The turntable base shall be made of cast Iron (IS: 210 grade FG200) and
the main spur gear shall be of cast High tensile alloy steel (IS: 2644 –Gr2 240-250 BHN final
hardness). The turntable will be mounted on top of the center column and will have
positive levelling features. The spur gear shall be running on a built-up large diameter high
chrome alloy steel bearing balls (AFBMA Gr 500, 62-65 RC) and four replaceable hardened
alloy steel inserts (AISI 4140/equivalent 36- 38 Rc final Hardness) pressed into the annular
grooves in the gear and turntable base all running in an oil bath. The base will have
provision for dust seal and complete with oil fill, level and drain fittings. All gears and
bearings shall run in an oil bath. Readily accessible lubricant fill and drainpipes with
necessary fittings shall be provided. The drive worm shaft shall be free to move
horizontally within the limits afforded by a calibrated compression spring at the thrust end.
The worm shaft movement shall be transmitted to the drive control by a pin contacting the
cam support and camshaft, thereby actuating the pointer. The pointer shall indicate
relative torque load on a 0 to 100% graduated scale. Four cams and limit switches shall be
included. Cams shall be independently adjustable over the full torque range. Two limit
switches shall be shop-adjusted to sound an alarm and stop the drive motor at
predetermined torque settings. Switches and cams shall be mounted in a weatherproof
steel box having conduit terminal strips. The drive shall be designed for a duty rated torque
of 2500 Kg-M with the main gear and pinion set designed for a yield torque of at least four
times the duty rated torque. The drive main bearing shall be designed for a B10 bearing life
of minimum 20 years with continuous operation & full total rotating mechanism weight.
shall consist of Stainless Steel 304 grating type floor plate with necessary stiffeners and
supports, resting on the center assembly, and provided with connections to the walkway.
The platform shall be surrounded by handrails 1000mm high.
There shall be a fixed feed well surrounding the inlet RCC pipe and it shall be integrally
attached to the scraper drive assembly and the scum scraper assembly for uniform
movement. The diameter of the feed well shall be between 22% to 25% of the diameter of
the clarifier so as to limit the downward velocity calculated on full plan area of the feed
well not exceeding 1.5 m / sec. The immersed depth of the feed well shall be between 55 %
to 65 % of the side water depth of the clarifier. The material of the feed well and all fixtures
either partly or wholly exposed to atmosphere or fully submerged shall all be of MS
FRP/epoxy coated. The thickness of the feed well shall not be less than 8 mm.
The center cage shall be of a steel box truss construction and shall be provided with
connections for the sludge rake arms and feed well supports. It shall be bolted to the main
gear, which shall rotate the cage with the attached rake arms, and feed well. The main gear
attachment to the cage shall have provision for adjustment to ensure levelling of the cage.
Structural members as well as non structural members shall all be spliced 30 cm on both
sides of the wastewater interface with MSEP members to prevent corrosion from the
waterline and propagate to the whole assembly.
The 1.0-mtr wide walkway with handrails shall be supported by the drive platform at the
center and the tank wall at its outer end and shall be designed to safely withstand all
normal operating loads. It shall consist of two (2) side wide flange beams of welded steel
construction, with the walkway of MSEP grating floor plate supported by the cross
members. A toe plate of 150 mm height made of 6 mm thick MSEP sheet shall be provided
on both the running edges. The height of protective hand railing & piping shall be 1000 mm
from walkway upto the top row of piping and the steel member supporting this piping shall
not project for more than 10 cm above this level and shall be finished with bevelled edges.
The piping shall be in three rows of MSEP NB size thick-walled and vertically spaced at
30cm, 60cm and 90 cm from walkway elevation. The horizontal spacing of the steel
members supporting these pipes shall not exceed 1.5m center to center. These shall be
integrally welded to the steel tensile members of the bridge. All structural steel members
and fasteners used in the construction of the bridge shall be hot dip galvanized/SS 304.
steel.
Secondary sludge return pumps
These pumps shall draw the sludge from the secondary settling tanks and pump it to the
sludge storage tank. They shall be directly coupled to the suction piping and shall be
provided with blank flanged after a double flanged valve, so that if needed, this can be used
as an auxiliary air hose point for releasing any clogged conditions of the sludge pipe. The
pumps shall be of monolithic construction with its own internal oil cooling system and shall
be of the dry submersible type. There shall be two pumps of which one will be working at a
time and the other will be a standby.
The pump shall be vertical submersible with a duty of 25 m3 / hour at a head of 8 m. The
pump shall be required to pump out biological sludge at a solids concentration of close to
12,000 mg/l.
corrodible nameplate securely fitted onto the motor frame.
The impeller shall be able to pass soft solids of 75 mm size approximately spherical. The
impeller shall be of the screw centrifugal type as in the case of “Hidrostal” of UK or
equivalent. The impeller shall be duly dynamically balanced and finished.
The material of the casing shall be in high-grade cast iron. The material of the impeller shall
be nodular iron. The material of the shaft shall be stainless steel.
The pump shall have oil cooled motor construction and consequently, any leakages of oil
beyond the tandem mechanical seals shall be automatically detected by a dedicated inbuilt
probe which shall automatically trip the pump and the construction shall be explosion
proof [as this will be installed in the dry pit below ground level] and conform to Axed 11B
T3-T4 rating.
Sludge storage tank: The storage tank is equipped with 4 low speed mixers to prevent
sedimentation of sludge and clogging from pipes. From the storage tank the sludge is
pumped to the sludge dewatering plant. In case of emergency it is pumped to the sludge
drying beds.
Sludge collection tank & mixer
Size 1.5 m x 1.5 m x 2.0 m + 0.3m FB
Type of tank RCC, M 20
Mixing equipment Turbine paddle mixer
MOC of mixer SS
MOC of motor housing SS
Power rating 0.75 kW
Quantity 4 no.
Sludge dewatering (mechanical):

Name of the item Chamber Filter press
Design Capacity Filter press – 4t/day, 2 Nos. (for both new and existing modules)
Major Components (4) Filter press with all accessories.

Proposed
Justification (1) Sludge generated in plant is at present dewatered by solar

sludge drying bed which take upto 20 days for complete
dewatering.
(2) During rains the dewatering does not occur at all.
(3) To handle this issue two Chamber filter presses have been
proposed which will dewater the sludge less than 6hours.
If upgradation
Benefit (1) The filter press will ensure achieving full capacity of CETP.
(2) Better dewatering of sludge leading to safer and easier transport
to SLF.
Measurable Output (2) Chamber filter press – 4t/d –2 nos.
The dewatering system consists of a mechanical sludge dewatering, namely, filter press to
achieve a dry solids concentration in the dewatered sludge of 30%. The liquid fraction from
the dewatering system is returned to the equalisation tank. Sludge storage and
conditioning system using lime has been proposed.
Filter press feed pump
Capacity 2-5 m3/h
Type Progressive cavity
MOC rotor Hardened tool Steel
MOC of stator Nemo Last S65/neoprene
Joint Pin joint
Base plate MS
Power 2 kW
Make Nemo / Tushaco / Eqvt.
Quantity 2 nos. (1 W + 1 S)
Filter Press unit

The equipment shall include filter press frame, hydraulic closing system, filtrate tray, drip
tray, polypropylene filter plates, filter cloth, automatic plate shifting device for cake
discharging, light curtain and such other fittings, devices or appurtenances necessary for a
complete operating installation.
The inlet sludge will be either Lime/Alum precipitated primary sludge or excess biological
sludge or both fed from the sludge storage tank. The feed concentration may be 3 % solids.
The solid concentration of the cake shall be at least 35 %. The percent recovery of
suspended solids shall be at least 90 %. The volume of inlet sludge will be 100 m3 per 24
hours and it shall be dewatered in 16 hours a day. The ratio of chemically precipitated
primary sludge and excess biological secondary sludge is about 5: 1. There shall be
adequate numbers of filter presses such that the standby capacity at any given time is 50 %
of the functioning numbers to dewater 100 m3 in 16 hours. The number of sludge feed
pumps shall match the number of filter presses.
The filter press frame shall be able to withstand the full static weight of the equipment
including the wet cake. The material of construction shall be in weldable structural steel
conforming to IS 2062. The frame shall be so designed as to permit an easy access to all the
parts mounted over it and still permit an easy access to all the controls mounted over it.
The frame shall be anchored into the floor with anti rusting fasteners as defined already in
this document. The frame shall be designed and constructed to withstand the slurry feed
pressure of minimum 15 kg / cm2.
The hydraulic closing system shall close the filter pack with a minimum pressure
[operating] of 380 kg / cm2 and shall be automatic. The system shall include a double
acting hydraulic cylinder, hydraulic power pack, hydraulic hoses, set point transducer with
digital LED display of minimum 5cm height of each character and tuned and set for control
of the hydraulic pressure. There shall also be a manually switcheable [ in case one of the
sensing systems is out of operation or taken out for maintenance] parallel installation using
a pressure gauge of the analog dial type of minimum readability of 600 kg / cm2 and of
minimum 100 mm dial diameter and the pressure sensing shall be of diaphragm type. Both
these shall be installed on the hydraulic cylinder itself.
The filtrate tray shall be mounted on one side of the filter press to suit the site erection and
shall be constructed in SS 04 minimum 3 mm thick with sufficient flanges for filtrate
pipeline connections.
The drip tray shall be made of SS 304 minimum 3-mm thickness/ FRP 5 mm thick with two
door overlap type to avoid filtrate dripping onto the floor and to guide the filter cake to the
cake discharge system with interlocking system, which shall be connected to the plate
shifting device.
The filter plates should be made of virgin all polypropylene resin and should be designed
and constructed to operate with a slurry pressure of 16 kg / cm2 and should be of recessed
chamber type. The filter plates shall have sufficient number of handles and filtrate drain
bibs for open filtrate discharge. The filter plates should have filter cloth holding pins.
The opening of the filter plates to discharge the filter cakes would be done manually. The
guide rail for the smooth movement of the plates shall be designed with suitable
dimensions.
Filter Presses Feed Pumps
These pumps shall be of the progressive cavity type and draw the sludge from the sludge
storage tank and pump it to the dewatering equipment directly. They shall be directly
coupled to the suction piping and shall be provided with blank flanged after a double
and there shall be two pumps of which one will be working at a time and the other will be a
standby.
There shall be adequate number of pumps such that there are 50 % standby pumps over
and above the number of pumps needed to handle 100 m3 of thickened sludge in 16 hours.
The number of installed and functioning pumps shall match the number of filter press
installations such that each filter press is having a dedicated pump for itself at all times. A
delivery head that can yield an operating pressure of about 15 bar and a maximum
pressure of 18 bar is considered as required for feeding the filter press. The tenderer shall
however estimate the required delivery head and offer pumps of such delivery head as
needed by him.
corrodible nameplate securely fitted onto the motor frame. The required speed reduction
shall be attained by the use of an on-line gearbox foot mounted on its casing and its rotating
axis being horizontal to align with the rotor on one side and the motor on the other side.
The material of the gearbox casing shall be of cast iron IS 210 Grade 30. The material of the
gears shall be C 40 with hardening. The free end of the motor shall be securely fitted onto a
rest plate to avoid counter hung pressure on the coupling between the rotor shaft and the
motor shaft. The coupling shall be of the “Lovejoy” variety and no other m types shall be
allowed.
displaced thorough the impeller. The stator and rotor shall be custom designed to permit
the passage of at least a 50-mm diameter soft solid and shall be freely displaced without
disfigurement on testing at factory before acceptance.
The shaft sealing shall be preferably attained by mechanical seals to ensure higher
reliability in this important location.
All fasteners in direct contact with the throughput shall be of SS 304 and all others shall be
of hot dipped galvanized steel.
 Sludge drying beds (to be modified and retained for emergency sludge storage and
dewatering).
 Ancillary provisions
o Operational and administrative building, including control room, compressors

and pumps buildings, sludge dewatering building, office, chemicals storage
rooms, chemicals mixing and dosing building, laboratory.
o Effluent flow measurement and monitoring. The CETP is operated manually.
o Roads, sewer systems, drains, fences, etc.
o Emergency power standby generator set.
Scheme of new CETP module
The new CETP modules expected to cater to (a) additional effluent expected when the
tanneries start finishing operations, (b) the effluent from new tanneries which are going to
set up their tanneries in the IGC to make the treated effluent to meet the prescribed norms
by J & K PCB.
For the sake of uniform operation and maintenance, it is envisaged that the new CETP
module could be a replica of existing CETP units.
The layout of the new units was planned in such a manner that it joins the existing
structure and the entire combined layout shall appear elegant and symmetrical.
Collection & conveyance lines DISTRIBUTION CHAMBER WITH SCREEN
EQUALISATION TANK FLASH MIXER FLOCCULATOR
ALUM
DIFFUSED AERATION-1 CLARIFIER
LIME
SECONDARY CLARIFIER-1 CHAMBER FILTER PRESS
POLYELECTROLYTE DIFFUSED AERATION-2
CETP design basis

SECURED LANDFILL
SECONDARY CLARIFIER-2
Treated effluent for disposal
Figure 2.8: The scheme of treatment proposed for the new CETP module:
2.10 Design basis for the project

2.12 Design basis of CETP
Parameter Value
Duty 20 hrs operation
Capacity 500 m3/d
Type Physical-Chemical followed by biological
treatment
Coarse screening Coarse mechanical screen 15 mm
Equalization mixing Submersible mixers
Equalization time 20 hours
Chemicals used in primary treatment Lime (400 mg/l), alum (300 mg/l) and
and dosages maintained Polyelectrolyte (2 mg/l)
BOD & COD removal in primary 40% &50%

Type of aeration Fine bubble diffused aeration
F/M ratio 0.15
MLSS concentration 3000-4000 mg/l.
Sludge dewatering Chamber Filter Press
Dewatered sludge moisture 30-35%
Dewatered sludge disposal Secured Landfill
The design of new CETP module would be similar to the existing module including the
layout. The outlet of the CETP modules should have characteristics prescribed by J & K PCB
for treated tannery effluent from IGC.
2.11 Hazardous sludge disposal

Secured Landfill (SLF)
Name of the item Secured Landfill (SLF)
Design Capacity 15,000 m3 volume
Major Components (1) 15,000 m3 Secured landfill with RCC basement,

Proposed (2) All accessories required for landfill.
Justification (1) At present the dewatered sludge is dumped haphazardly within

the CETP premises, creating groundwater contamination.
(2) There is no centralized landfill in the State.
(3) The generation of sludge from the upgraded CETP @35% solids
content would be about 6.8 tons/day, say about 2000 tons/year.
Accounting for actual operation and consolidation of sludge over
the years, a 15000 m3 landfill should be adequate for next 10-15
years.
(4) A captive landfill will ensure scientific and proper disposal of
dewatered sludge.
Category Secured Landfill
If upgradation --
Benefit (1) Scientific and safe disposal of sludge.

(2) Will help the CETP achieving full treatment capacity.
Measurable Output (1) Secured Landfill for sludge disposal.
(2) Disposal of about 15,000 tons of dewatered sludge.

The design of the Secured Landfill (SLF) is based on the assumption that the sludge from
CETP will be disposed in it without any pre-treatment (thermal treatment, chemical
conditioning etc.) prior to disposal.
There are solid wastes generated in member tanneries too. The solid waste includes hair,
fleshing, leather trimmings etc. However, most of these solid wastes find use in other
industries. For instance, most of the hair removed from the sheep skin in the tanneries of
Lassipora IGC is reportedly sold as raw material for carpet manufacturers. The manner of
disposal of other solid wastes is not fully known, most likely these are disposed
haphazardly, but the same does not seem to have created an issue so far. Hence, the solid
waste disposal facility proposed here is primarily meant for disposal of the sludge from
primary clarifier and wasted sludge from the secondary clarifier. The primary clarifier
sludge can be designated as chemical sludge while the secondary clarifier sludge may be
termed as biological sludge. According to Hazardous Waste (Management and Handling)
Amended Rules, 2000, the sludge has been designated as hazardous waste.
The composition of the CETP sludge (primary and secondary mixed sludge) is assumed
based on the general characteristics of dried sludge from tannery CETPs as follows.
Table 2.13: Characteristics of CETP Sludge at IGC
Parameter Values
pH 7.4 – 7.8
Moisture Content (%) 65 – 72
Volatile Solid (%) 13 – 16
Total Chromium (mg/kg) 5000-10,000 mg/kg
Lead (mg/kg) 12 – 18
Zinc (mg/kg) 30 – 50
Iron (mg/kg) 500 – 1000
Nickel (mg/kg) 12 – 16
Copper (mg/kg) 3–6
Chloride (mg/kg) 1800– 5500
Quantity of sludge for disposal

For estimation purpose, the quantity of sludge from the pre-treatment units in individual
tanneries and that from the existing treatment units has been estimated as follows:
a) Pre-treatment sludge, grit, screenings & sediments: 0.4 tons/day @about 60%
moisture.
b) CETP primary sludge assuming only alum dosing (0.2 g/l) and 80% removal of TSS in
primary stage @600 m3/d flow: 3.46 tons/day @about 65% moisture.
c) Wasted secondary sludge assuming 0.2kg/kg BOD removed: 0.54 tons/day @65%
moisture content.
d) Additional sludge from the primary & secondary treatment when the proposed 0.5 MLD
additional module of CETP too starts operating: 2.4 t/d. The value is lower because the
additional operations would involve mostly finishing operations, having lower
suspended solids, but may need addition of both alum and lime.
Total sludge for disposal: 6.8 tons/day, say about 2000 tons/year, considering 300 days of
operation. Since the actual scale of operation could be widely varying for different seasons,
the sludge generation could be much less than this value and it is felt that a SLF of 15,000
m3 capacity should be adequate for about 10-15 years of operation.
Safe Landfill design and planning
Although the current project activities only entail the design of one module for CETP sludge
for the next 10-15 years, it is anticipated that in the future more modules may be
constructed. As such a lay-out plan for the first module is prepared, with attention for the
optimum and most economical methodology for planning and construction of more
modules and the ancillary works in stages.
Security building and weighbridge etc. will be common to all future modules.
2.11.1 Design of Landfill
The selection on the type of landfill, liner materials to be used, and other elements of
landfill are designed based on the sludge characteristics expected from IGC CETP and the
site conditions. The major elements considered for the detailed design are discussed in
subsequent sections.
Design Period
Currently only 3 tanneries are in operation and it is anticipated that all tanneries will start
their operation in a period of 2-3 years.
The salient features for landfill are as under:
1. Capacity of SLF to be adequate for 10-15 years
2. Trench type of landfill partly above and partly below ground level
3. No preliminary treatment of sludge and solid waste
4. Leachate collection and removal system (LCRS) / drainage layer
5. Provision of flexible membrane liner (FML)
6. Provision of geonet
7. Leachate collection and transportation to CETP for treatment
8. Dumping of sludge into land fill is not manual
The sludge from CETP filter presses/drying beds will be transported to the sludge landfill.
The exact soil profile or texture for the identified disposal site is not available. It is not
possible to get representative soil samples during this phase of project and this may be
taken up during the tendering of works. During the visit to the site, it is observed that the
soil in the entire IGC area is almost the same and is firm ground. The general soil profile in
the proposed SLF location is assumed as under in Table 8:
Table 2.14: Soil Conditions at IGC
Top soil Semi impervious

Clay 25 % to 29%
Silt and sand 52 % to 71 %
Cone Penetration 2 to 4 blows /30 cm
Particle size < 0.1 mm
Plastic limit 20-25%
Liquid Limit 50-60%
Plasticity Index 30-35
Moisture Content 30-35%
Bulk Density 16-18 KN/m3
Dry Density 10-12 KN/m3
Specific Gravity 2.25-2.5
It is estimated that the soil up to 30 m depth from ground level is almost semi impervious.
The sludge will be compacted to minimize the settlement of waste layer (leading to
possible cover failure after closure of landfill operating period). This additional space
arising out of compaction will take shock load or increased sludge generation unexpectedly
occurred due to increased production of leather in IGC.
Foundation
The loads imposed by a landfill on its foundation soils will not typically be modified by the
settlements because of the flexibility of landfill. Therefore, the loads on the foundation soils
at any point within a landfill footprint can be approximated to the overburden pressure at
that point. Deformation of the foundation soil, and hence their impacts on the liner and
leachate collection system, can be estimated based on the foundation soil properties and
the superimposed landfill loads at different points. Since the landfill height varies
gradually, no sudden change in superimposed loads is likely to occur. Therefore, a shear
failure of the liner or the leachate collection system will not be anticipated unless the
foundation soil conditions, especially the strength of the foundation soils, change abruptly.
Such changes may occur when unstable materials such as peat, muck, loose saturated
sands, soft clays, etc., occur below the landfill. The geotechnical investigation conducted at
the adjacent IGC site show that these unfavorable conditions do not occur at this site.
Therefore, the loads and the loading rate induced by the landfill construction are not likely
to cause or contribute to the failure of liner or leachate collection system.
It is proposed to excavate the earth to a depth equal to liner system and leakage detection
layer.
After excavation, suitable soil should be filled to designed compacted depth. The soil
meeting all technical requirements is filled in lifts. After compaction, another soil layer is
placed and rolled. This process of spreading and compacting is carried out till the thickness
of foundation layer is achieved. The water to be added should be equivalent to optimum
moisture content so the maximum dry density can be achieved. The final permeability of
this foundation layer that also acts as an impermeable layer should be at least 1 x 10 -7
cm/sec.
Liner System
The primary function of the landfill is not to allow the leachate to leave the landfill and
enter the soil and ground water. This can be achieved by providing a liner system. The
liner system is to provide an effective hydraulic barrier beneath the waste to contain the
waste and to allow for the effective removal of leachate generated within the waste mass.
In this present case, a composite liner system has been selected because it best meets the
performance criterion and provides a high margin of safety. This liner design consists of
the following integrated components, all of which will be compatible with the leachate,
from bottom to top:
The primary criteria considered in the selection of liner material are compatibility with the
waste to be disposed and to withstand design period. The thickness of liner is based on the
Characteristics of waste and load.
The liner materials considered in this design include Reinforced Cement Concrete and
flexible membrane liner (FML).
RCC base liner: The entire tank bottom shall be constructed in M 20 grade RCC of minimum
thickness as needed by the soil bearing capacity and maximum water level during the
monsoon. As a thumb rule RCC slab of thickness 300 mm for the bottom slab and 250 mm
for the side walls may be considered as adequate for the purpose.
Geo-membrane: The material selected for the geomembrane component of the composite
liner is based on its low hydraulic conductivity and its high resistance to various chemicals,
ozone, vapors, ultraviolet rays, and soil microorganisms. The main criteria are on the
compatibility of FML with the leachate. Unfortunately, a direct evaluation of the
compatibility between leachate constituent and FML is not possible during this design
stage of a landfill. Since HDPE is extensively used in a majority of landfills in other
countries, HDPE liner is suggested.
Drainage Layer
The function of drainage layer, also called the leachate collection and removal system
(LCRS) is to collect and convey the leachate from the liner to a leachate transfer system for
removal. The leachate collection system is designed to meet the following performance
goals:
 Effective collection of leachate

 Provide sufficient capacity for anticipated maximum volumes
 Be of sufficient strength for anticipated loads including an adequate safety factor
 Be accessible for pipeline cleaning equipment during operation and post-closure
maintenance periods.
As the bottom liners have 1 in 200 slope for effective leachate collection, the drainage layer
will also have the same slope by default. The drainage layer is designed for maintaining a
laminar flow. This can be achieved by providing a minimal leachate head above the liner.
The leachate generation can be computed using water balance method or using HELP
model.
The drainage layer consists of a blue metal media and sand. According to US EPA, the
granular material requires a minimum hydraulic conductivity of 1 x 10 -3 cm/sec. This
material will typically be a medium sand.
To collect the leachate within the drainage layer, perforated PVC/HDPE pipes are required
to be laid. Due to large size of the landfill, it is suggested to have network consisting of
laterals, and main risers. The spacing of laterals are parallel to shorter side (east-west), and
sloped towards a V-shaped collection trench. The trench contains perforated collection
pipes embedded in washed stone. The pipe is designed with an open channel flow capacity
that exceeds the estimated peak flows. All the laterals will join the main risers. The stone
material within the trench provides for proper bedding of the pipe and also serves as a
secondary flow channel towards the leachate removal sump. The stone is encapsulated in a
properly sized non-woven geotextile to prevent fines from clogging the drainage trench. A
portion of the top of the collection trench is left uncovered so that leachate flow into trench
will occur in the event of geotextile clogging by microorganisms.
The drainage layer consists of (from bottom to top):
 Flexible membrane liner (FML) such as HDPE/LDPE/PVC/Neoprene/Butyl Rubber

 Granular soil
 Fine sand
 Main riser perforated pipe
 Lateral perforated pipe
Leachate Management System

The leachate management system consists of a combination of storage and disposal
components and features a monitoring system. The storage and disposal components have
been designed to handle all leachate generated by the waste disposal unit under maximum
flow conditions. The monitoring system is designed to monitor leachate constituent prior
to treatment.
The main constituent in the leachate is the chromium. It is experienced in India that the
chromium in the tannery sludge is mostly in trivalent state with traces of hexavalent
chromium, if at all. The drinking water quality criteria mention only as total chromium.
Therefore, the leachate treatment is considered for total chromium irrespective of its state.
Secondly, the water-soluble portion of chromium is insignificant as the trivalent chromium
is water insoluble. Thus, the actual chromium concentration is likely to be in low level.
Although there are no specific regulations in India for leachate, the treatment and disposal
method is recommended to comply with the Water Pollution (Prevention and Control) Act
1974.
Sump
The leachate collection system has been designed to route all leachate to main riser pipes,
which then direct the leachate towards leachate removal sumps. The leachate collection
system is sloped towards the header pipes to flow by gravity. The header pipe is also
sloped towards the sump.
It is suggested to construct the sump on one side just outside the boundary. As such a sump
of 3 m x 3 m x 2.5 m constructed in RCC M 20 is considered adequate. This sumphas been
sized such that under maximum flow conditions, the collected leachate can be removed
before the level of leachate in the sump rises above the invert of the collection pipes. The
leachate will be pumped for transportation to equalization tank of the CETP for disposal.
However, on dry days, the leachate can be pumped back into the landfill for wetting the
daily clay cover.
Final Cover of the Landfill
Once the landfill becomes full (up to free board level), the landfill has to be closed with a
proper cover. The final cover is designed to minimize the surface water infiltration (thus
minimizing leachate generation), support vegetation, minimize the effects of changes in
climate and to provide an aesthetically acceptable final shape. The infiltration of water into
the waste layer has been considered as the most important criteria while designing the
cover. The leachate generation is mainly due to the entry of rain water into waste layer.
Thus, the leachate generation can be minimized by preventing the entry of water that can
be achieved by providing barrier at the top of the landfill. This barrier is termed as cover
system.
Another aspect that was considered while designing the cover system is the end use after
closure and minimum maintenance.
The minimum requirements for landfill cover are as under:
 Low hydraulic conductivity composite liner
 Drainage layer:
 Top vegetation/soil layer:
In addition, the cover is tested against the possible settlement and subsidence. If the landfill
is operated settlement and subsidence will not occur. If settlement occurs, the cover will
collapse. Secondly, waste is not likely to be decomposed. However as worst scenario, due to
presence of secondary sludge that may contain active organism, decomposition may take
place to an extent. This decomposition rate cannot be computed at this stage in view of
absence of input data. Also the stability of waste layers and their intermediate covers, the
soil and foundation materials beneath the landfill site, all the liner and drainage system
were considered.
The waste layer top should be compacted and leveled. After leveling, impervious clay layer
is placed and compacted. While compacting, slope of 3% should be given. It is suggested to
have higher height at the center and give gradient towards the embankment on all four
side. This clay should be free from debris, clods, rocks, etc., The surface should be smooth
so that the FML (HDPE/LDPE) to be placed over this does not get damaged.
The main objective of cover system is not to allow water to enter the waste layer.
Therefore, provision has to be made to drain out the water. A drainage layer with soil is
recommended. As the water has to pass through, it is designed for a hydraulic conductivity
of 1 x 10-2 cm/sec. This higher hydraulic conductivity requires higher size soil and high
void ratio. The bottom of drainage layer is also sloped at 3%. No perforated pipe for water
collection is recommended as it may damage the geomembrane. The water will be collected
at the sides of the embankment and drain into a ditch.
Above the drainage layer, it is preferred to lay a geonet. This will prevent the entry of the
top soil onto the drainage soil from clogging.
The top of cover may be subdivided into two sub-layers. Immediately above the geonet,
loamy type soil is placed. The cover system will have vegetation layer at the top. The
surface slope should be 3%. In case while constructing the vegetation is not feasible, other
materials can be considered. A surface layer of 25 cm deep stones or cobbles can be placed.
2.12 Infrastructure Facilities
The infrastructure facilities required are:

 Security & Administrative cabin
 Weigh Bridge
 Roads
 Storm water drain
 Green Belt
The infrastructure mentioned above is common to the present module of SLF and for any
modules coming up in future.
Security & Administrative cabin
It is proposed on the western side adjacent to the entry gate. This room should have
capacity to accommodate about 2 staff only. The room is attached with toilet facility.
Weigh Bridge
As per HWM Amended Rules 2016, the solid waste to be disposed should be properly
recorded. It is recommended to establish a weigh bridge. The trucks will stand on the
weigh bridge and weight is recorded.
Road
The suggested width of road is 8 m. The approach to the SLF dumping point would have
sufficient spacing for turning and holding a truck or tractor-trailer. The proposed road is
water macadam type with bitumen on top.
Storm Water drain
The storm water drain is proposed on all sides at the foot of landfill. The rain water runoff
from the embankment is likely to be a major source of such water. It is suggested to have
two direction - gradients. The final outlet is on the north east corner. Then the drain will be
connected to the drain of IGC.
Green Belt
It is advisable to have green belt on all direction to improve the aesthetic value of the site.
The suggested width is 3 m. Tall trees can be planted at close interval. It is proposed to
extend the site to a length of about 0.2 km for constructing the landfill for future. In view of
this it is suggested to establish the green belt on the outer periphery.
Monitoring
The leachate collection and removal system provided in addition to barriers (liners) in the
landfills will minimize the ground water contamination. However due to varied reasons,
leachate may find its way into ground water. Hence, it is essential to monitor the
groundwater quality at regular interval. This also helps to adopt remedial measures to
prevent increasing the contaminated area. This can be achieved through installing
piezometer. A bore hole upto unconfined water table with a suitable material is to be
installed. The gap between the pipe and the natural soil is then filled with soil and with
concrete (30 cm from ground level). The water from the piezometer is collected initially
every week. The frequency of sampling can be reduced to once 15 days after three months.
The sampling frequency is once in a month after a year.
Alternative power supply arrangement
Design Capacity 0.5 MW SPV type power supply system.
Major Components (1) New solar power supply system, PV unit (Si-Crystalline type)
Proposed with accessories.
(2) Connectivity to grid system to EB Network of the IGC.

Justification (1) Power, along with diesel for DGs, forms the major cost
component (>50%) in the CETP.
(2) Frequent power shut downs affect regular operation of the
CETP.
(3) An inhouse solar power project shall reduce the cost of
operation, make it more sustainable and ensure regular
operation.
(4) Sufficient land is available in the CETP premises.
If upgradation --
Benefit (1) Reduction of O & M cost of the CETP by 35%.

(2) Uninterrupted operation of the CETP
(3) Full capacity operation.
Measurable Output (1) New solar power supply system with accessories.
(2) About 3500-4000 kWh of power per day.
2.13 Alternative Power Supply Arrangements :
Power is currently sourced from the J&K EB through the sub-station present for the
IGC and from in-house Diesel Generating Sets during power outages. The proposed
photovoltaic power would supplement power from JKEB and DG Sets with a fuel-free
alternative the proposed facility, during sunshine hours. The advantage of the SPV
power is that it would be available during daylight hours from direct, diffused and
reflected radiation and would essentially be a fuel-free source. Sunshine hours at
Lassipora which enjoys 260-280 days per annum of sunshine, can avail of the resource
during the 5 to 7 hours each day. (Say, from 9 or 10-am up to 3 or 4-pm). With the
annual average of 4.9 kWh/m 2/day, Lassipora offers good potential for solar power
generation. The solar insolence in Lassipora region may be seen below:

Solar Insolance at Lassipora
8 7.2
7 6.81 6.7
6 6.18
5.68 5.71
5
4.93
4.6
3.57
4 3.06
2.6 2.6
3
2
1
0
JanFebMarAprMayJun Jul AugSepOctNovDec
Figure: 2.9 Solar irradiance in Lassipora region
It is proposed that the 0.5 MW solar power plant can be located in the backyard of the
CETP, where ample open space is available. The power produced during the day time can
be directly used in the CETP and the excess power can be given to the grid of IGC. Tis
power ca be offset for the consumption during the rest of the day in CETP.
Technical details of Alternative Energy Backup modules

Solar module : Si-crystalline (global tier 250-325 Wp)
Structure : SS mounting structure
Plant sizing : AC to DC ratio is considered 1:10
Central invertor : 850 Kw, 415v AC, 50Hz, MPPT
Monitoring : Data logger -1 no
Si rad. Sensor – 1No
AC distribution board with : 1No

breakers & energy meter
Earthing kit, Earthing wire : 25 mm*5mm – 1 no

& GI earth strip
Lightning arrestor : 1no
Cable couplers : 1 No
Other requirements
 Solar invertor and control cable

 Auxiliary system with distribution boards, junction boxes, cables etc.
 All items associated electrical works required for interfacing 11kV grid SCADA system
for monitoring power plant
 Weather monitoring station and SCADA
Basis of capacity required
The upgraded CETP would consume about 4000 kWh per day. This would go up during the
operation of oxidation units. The minimum requirement, considering the lean seasons,
would be about 3,000 kWh power.
For about 6-7 hours sunshine, power production 3500-4000 kWh (units) per MW per day
as annual average could be expected in the prevailing conditions in Lassipora. Thus, a0.5
MW unit would produce about 2000 units per day, which would be fully consumed by the
CETP, even in lean season. Accordingly, a 0.5 MW PV based solar power plant has been
considered.
Table 2.15 Quality of treated waste water
S.No. Parameter Values

1. pH 5.5-9.0
2. Temperature Ambient
3. BOD 3 days at 270C 30 mg/L
4. Suspended Solids 100
5. COD 100 mg/L
6. Oil & Grease 10 mg/L
7. Chloride 600 mg/L
8. Sulfate 1000 mg/L
9. Dissolved solids (inorganic) 2100 mg/L
10. Phenolic compounds 1 mg/L
11. Ammonical Nitrogen (as N) 50 mg/L
12. T.K.N 100 mg/L
13. Cyanides (as CN) 0.1 mg/L
14. Hexavalent Chromium (as Cr +6) 0.1 mg/L
15. TotalChromium(as Cr ) 2 mg/L
16. Copper (as Cu) 3 mg/L
17. Lead (as Pb) 0.1 mg/L
18. Nickel (as Ni) 3 mg/L
19. Zinc (as Zn) 3 mg/L
20. Arsenic (as As) 0.2 mg/L
21. Mercury (as Hg) 0.01 mg/L
22. Cadmium 1 mg/L
23. Selenium (as Se) 0.05 mg/L
24. Fluoride (as F) 2 mg/L
25. Sulphide (as S) 10 mg/L
26. Boron (as B) 2 mg/L
27. Alpha emitters Absent
28. Beta Emitters Absent
29. Pesticide Absent
EIA for the upgradation and expansion of CETP of 600 KLD to 1100 KLD capacity
and implementation of SLF at Industrial Growth Centre, Lassipora, District-Pulwama,
J&K by M/s J& K SIDCO.
CHAPTER -3
DESCRIPTION OF ENVIRONMENT
3.1 Introduction
Information on the existing environmental status is essential for assessing the likely
environmental impacts of the project. In order to get an idea about the existing state of
the environment, various environmental attributes such as meteorology, air quality,
water quality, soil quality, noise level, ecology and socio-economic environment have
been studied/ monitored.
3.2 Study Area and Period
For the description of baseline environmental scenario, the project area for 1100 KLD
CETP falling within the premises of J&K SIDCO area has been considered as the core
zone. The area falling within a distance of 10 km from the boundary of the core zone has
been considered as the buffer zone.
Baseline environmental data generation for air, water, noise and soil quality monitoring
around the project site was completed from 1st March to 30th May 2018 representing
post-monsoon season.
3.3 BASELINE MONITORING OF ENVIRONMENTAL COMPONENT

In order to get an idea about the existing state of the environment, various
environmental attributes such as meteorology, ambient air quality, water quality, soil
quality, noise level, ecology and socio-economic environment have been
studied/monitored.
3.3.1 Meteorology
A meteorological station was set up at the project premises. Meteorological data was
generated during the March – May 2018.

The following parameters were recorded at hourly intervals continuously during
monitoring period:
I. Wind speed
II. Wind Direction
III. Ambient Air Temperature
IV. Relative Humidity
Table-3.1 gives summarized meteorological data for the monitoring period (March to
May 2018).
Figure-3.1 gives the wind-rose diagram for the monitoring period.
Table 3.1: Summarized Meteorological Data for the Monitoring Period
MONTH Wind Speed Temperature Relative
(m/h) (0C) Humidit
y
(%)
Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
March 4.9 3.1 16 2 50
2018
April 2018 5.4 3.4 25 7 46
May 2018 5.6 3.4 24 14 63
Fig 3.1 Wind Rose Diagram (March – May 2018)
3.3.2 Air Environment
To quantify the impact of the project on the ambient air quality, it is necessary at first
to evaluate the existing ambient air quality of the area. The existing ambient air
quality, in terms of Particulate Matter (PM10), Sulphur-dioxide (SO 2) and Oxides of
Nitrogen (NO2), has been measured for 24 hrs.
To assess the ambient air quality level, 9 (nine) monitoring stations were set up.
Table-3.2 gives location of the ambient air quality monitoring stations.

Table 3.2: Location of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations
Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations

STATION NAME DIRECTION DISTANCE
Code
AAQ-1 Project Site Centre 0 Km
AAQ-2 Pulwama NNW 9.8 Km
AAQ-3 Killora SW 4.128 Km
AAQ-4 Aloora SE 3.275 Km
AAQ-5 Malangpora NE 2.60 Km
AAQ-6 Kach dorah SW 7.9 Km
AAQ-7 Shopian SW 1.24 Km
AAQ-8 Avantipora NE 11.547 Km
AAQ-9 Gundchahal SW 4.33 Km
3.3.2.1 Monitoring Schedule
Ambient air quality monitoring was carried out twice a week with period of 24 hours
for three months (12 weeks).
3.3.2.2 Methods of Sampling and Analysis
The Air samples were analyzed as per standard methods specified by Central
Pollution Control Board (CPCB) and IS: 5182 series. The method used for ambient air
quality monitoring and methodology adopted are given in Table 3.3.
Table 3.3. Techniques used for Ambient Air Quality Monitoring
S. No. Parameters Technique Testing Protocol

1. PM10 RDS with cyclone separator CPCB Guidelines
followed by Gravimetric Method
analysis
2. SO2 Modified west and Gaeke CPCB Guidelines &
IS:5182 (Part - II)
3. NOx Jacob & Hochheiser CPCB Guidelines &
IS:5182 (Part - VI)
3.3.2.3 Selection of monitoring locations
The CPCB guide lines were adhered for monitoring network design. However, certain
adjustments were incorporated because of local infrastructure. Logistic
considerations as ready accessibility, security, availability of reliable power supply
etc. were examined while finalizing the monitoring locations. The locations of the
AAQ monitoring stations were based on the frequent wind directions besides at the
location of sensitive receptor as human habitation for exposure assessment. Ambient
air quality monitoring was carried out at nine locations within the study area during
1 March 2018 to 31 May 2018. All the ambient air analysis with respect to each
parameter was analyzed as per CPCB guidelines. The AAQ monitoring locations with
their terrain feature are provided in Table 3.2 & Table 3.4. Map showing locations of
Air Sampling is given in Map no. 3.1.
Figure : 3.2. Location of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations

3.3.2.4 Results and Discussions

The results of ambient air quality monitoring are summarized in the Table below:-
Table 3.4. Results of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring
Location Name of location PM10 SO2 NO2

(µg/m3) (µg/m3) (µg/m3)
Code
AQ1 Project Site 67.3 12.8 28.6
AQ2 Pulwama 67.0 11.6 23.5
AQ3 Killora 64.9 9.6 21.2
AQ4 Aloora 67.4 11.8 24.1
AQ5 Malangpora 65.9 11.0 25.4
AQ6 Kach dorah 64.2 10.9 23.3
AQ7 Shopian 67.3 11.9 25.3
AQ8 Avantipora 69.3 12.0 28.0
AQ9 Gundchahal 64.8 11.8 23.2
From the summarized monitoring results it is clear that, The PM 10 level in all the
monitoring locations of the study area was recorded are within the NAAQS level (100
µg/m³). The 24-hourly average levels of SO 2 and NO2 were observed to be within the limit
of 80 μg/m3 for residential, rural & other areas as stipulated in the National Ambient Air
Quality Standards (NAAQS).
3.3.3 Noise Levels
Noise is one of the most undesirable and unwanted by-products of our modern life
style. Excessive noise can cause neurological disturbances and physiological damage
to the hearing mechanism in particular. It is therefore, necessary to measure the
quantity of noise in and around the site.

3.3.3.1 Methodology
The intensity of sound energy in the environment is measured in a logarithmic scale

and is expressed in a decibel, dB (A) scale. In a sound level meter, an additional
circuit (filters) is provided, which modifies the received signal in such a way that it
replicates the sound signal as received by the human ear and the magnitude of sound
level in this scale is denoted as dB (A). The sound levels are expressed in dB (A) scale
for the purpose of comparison of noise levels, which is universally accepted by the
international community.
Noise levels were measured using sound level Meter. Noise level monitoring was
carried out continuously for 24 hours with one hour interval starting at 6:00AM to
6:00AM of next day. The noise levels were monitored on working days only. During
each hour Leq were directly computed by the instrument based on the sound
pressure levels. Lday and Lnight Monitoring were carried out at ‘A’ response and fast
mode.
3.3.3.2 Sampling Locations
A preliminary survey was undertaken to identify the major noise generating sources
in the area. The noise survey was conducted to assess the background noise levels in
different zones. Gazettes Notification (S.O. 123(E)) of MoEFCC dated February 14,
2000 on ambient air quality standards has different noise levels for different zones
viz. industrial, residential and silence zones. 9 sampling locations were selected for
the sampling of noise levels. The sampling locations are given in the Table Below:-
Table-3.5 . Location of Ambient Noise Quality Monitoring Stations
Ambient Noise Quality Monitoring Stations

STATION Code NAME DIRECTION DISTANCE
NQ-1 Project Site Centre 0 Km
NQ-2 Pulwama NNW 9.8 Km
NQ-3 Killora SW 4.128 Km
NQ-4 Aloora SE 3.275 Km
NQ-5 Malangpora NE 2.60 Km
NQ-6 Kach dorah SW 7.9 Km
NQ-7 Shopian SW 1.24 Km
NQ-8 Avantipora NE 11.547 Km
NQ-9 Gundchahal SW 4.33 Km
Figure 3.3: . Location of Noise Quality Monitoring Stations

3.3.3.3 Ambient Noise Standards
MoEFCC has notified the noise standards vide gazette notification dated February 14,
2000 for different zones under the Environment Protection Act (1986). These
standards are given in Table-3.6.
Table 3.6 . Ambient Quality Standards in respect of Noise
Area Code Category of Area Noise dB (A)

Leq Leq
Daytime* Night
A Industrial Area 75 70
B Commercial Area 65 55
C Residential Area 55 45
D Silence Zone 50 40
Note:
1. Daytime is from 6.00am to 10.00 pm and Nighttime is from 10.00 pm to 6.00 am.
2. Silence zone is defined as area up to 100 meters around premises of hospitals,

educational institutions and courts. Use of vehicle hours, loud speakers and bursting
of crackers are banned in these zones.
Ref.: MOEF Notification vide S.O. 123(E), dated 14.2.2000 and amendments made
after.
3.3.3.4 Results and Discussion
The results of ambient air quality monitoring are summarized in the Table below:-
Table 3.7 . Results for Noise Quality Monitoring
Location Name of Lmin Lmax Lday Lnight

Code location
NQ-1 Project Site 36.8 55.6 68.2 39.7
NQ-2 Pulwama 38.6 56.7 50.8 40.3
NQ-3 Killora 36.5 58.2 49.5 38.8

NQ-4 Aloora 37.5 57.6 51.1 39.4
NQ-5 Malangpora 36.9 56.7 51.5 38.9
NQ-6 Kach dorah 36.8 58.1 50.3 38.5
NQ-7 Shopian 38.6 58.1 51.3 39.7
NQ-8 Avantipora 39.5 61.3 54.9 41.6
NQ-9 Gundchahal 37.8 58.2 51.6 39.0
The noise data compiled on noise levels during May 2018 is given in Table - 3.6. It
can be seen that the night time Leq (Ln) varies from 38.5 to 41.6 dB (A) and the
daytime Leq (Ld) varies from 49.5 to 54.9 db (A) within the study area. Low noise
level is due to absence of any construction activity in the area.
Ambient noise level of the study area is within the prescribed National Ambient
Noise Quality Standard for respective residential, commercial and industrial category
at all the monitored locations.
3.3.4 Water Environment
3.3.4.1 Water Quality
Water quality assessment is one of the essential components of EIA study. Such
assessment helps in evaluating the existing health of water body and suggesting
appropriate mitigation measures to minimize the potential impact from development
projects. Water quality of ground water has been studied in order to assess proposed
water-uses in construction, drinking, cooling and horticulture purpose.
The water quality at the site and other locations within the 15 km impact zone was
monitored during March-May 2018. The location of the monitoring sites is depicted
in Fig. 3.4 and the result of the monitoring and analysis of ground water.
3.3.4.2 Sampling Frequency and Sampling Techniques

Parameters for analysis of water quality were selected based on the utility of the
particular source of water as per MoEF & CC guidance. Hence quality of ground water
was compared with IS: 10500: (Reaffirmed May: 2012) for drinking purposes.
Surface water quality was analyzed for parameters as mentioned in the ‘Methods of
Monitoring & Analysis published by CPCB (in Annexure –IV of CPCB guidelines)’ and
it was rated according to the CPCB Water Quality Criteria against A, B, C, D, & E class
of water based on parameters identified in the criteria. Water samples were collected
as grab water from sampling location in a 5 liter plastic jerry can and 500 ml
sterilized clean glass/pet bottle for complete physico-chemical and bacteriological
tests respectively. The samples were analyzed as per standard procedure / method
given in IS: 3025 (Revised Part) and standard method for examination of water and
wastewater Ed. 22nd, published jointly APHA, AWWA and WPCF.
The surface water quality is compared with CPCB water quality criteria mentioned in
Table 3.8.
Table 3.8: Water Quality Criteria as per Central Pollution Control Board
Designated-Best-Use Class of Criteria
water
Drinking Water Source A Total Coliforms Organism
without conventional MPN/100ml shall be 50 or
treatment but after less;
disinfection pH between 6.5 and 8.5
Dissolved Oxygen 6 mg/l or
more
Biochemical Oxygen Demand
5 days 20°C 2mg/l or less
Outdoor bathing B Total Coliforms Organism
(Organized) MPN/100ml shall be 500 or
less;
pH between 6.5 and 8.5;
Dissolved Oxygen 5mg/l or
more
Biochemical Oxygen Demand
5 days 20°C 3mg/l or less
Drinking water source C Total Coliform Organism
after MPN/100ml shall be
conventional treatment 5000 or less;
and pH
disinfection less
Propagation of Wild life D pH between 6.5 to 8.5
and Dissolved Oxygen 4mg/l or
Fisheries more
Free Ammonia (as N) 1.2
mg/l or less
Irrigation, Industrial E pH between 6.0 to 8.5
Cooling, Electrical Conductivity at
Controlled Waste 25°C micro mhos/cm
disposal Max.2250
Sodium absorption Ratio
Max. 26
Boron Max. 2mg/l
Below Not Meeting A, B, C, D & E
E Criteria
As per the standard practice, one sample from each station was taken each month in
the study period.
Sampling was done by standard sampling technique as per the Standard Methods.
Necessary precautions were taken for preservation of samples .
3.3.4.3 Sampling Locations
To quantify the impact of the project on the water quality (both groundwater and
surface water), it is necessary at first to evaluate the existing groundwater quality of
the area.
To assess the water quality level, 9 (nine) monitoring stations were set up.
Table 3.9: Location of Water Sampling Sites
Ground Water Monitoring Stations

Code
GW1 Project Site Centre 0 Km
GW2 Pulwama NNW 9.8 Km
GW3 Killora SW 4.128 Km
GW4 Aloora SE 3.275 Km
GW5 Malangpora NE 2.60 Km
GW6 Kach dorah SW 7.9 Km
GW7 Shopian SW 1.24 Km
GW8 Avantipora NE 11.547 Km
GW9 Gundchahal SW 4.33 Km
Surface Water Monitoring Stations (River Jhelum)
SW1 Upstream North, East 13 Km

and West
SW2 Downstream North, East 13 Km
and West
Figure 3.4: Location of Water Quality Monitoring Station

and implementation of SLF at Industrial Growth Centre, Lassipora, District-
Pulwama,
3.3.4.3 Result & Conclusion
The water quality in the impact zone was assessed through physico-chemical and
bacteriological analysis of ground and surface water samples. The results have been
compared with the drinking water quality standards specified in IS: 10500. It was
observed that all the physico-chemical parameters and heavy metals from surface
and ground water samples are below stipulated drinking water standards. pH of the
monitoring sites is in neutral to slight alkaline range i.e. 7.20-7.80. Alkalinity & TDS
are under the permissible limits but still the values are considerably high as
compared desired. Heavy metals such as Cu, Hg, Cd, Pb, and Zn are below the
desirable limit. Hardness of water depends upon the presence of Ca2+ & Mg2+
contents in water, which is higher than desirable limit and below the permissible
limit. All the ground water samples analyzed can be considered fit for drinking
purpose in the absence of alternate sources

Table 3.10 : Results of Ground water quality at the monitoring locations
S.No. Parameters Unit GW1 GW2 GW3 GW4 GW5 GW6 GW7 GW8 GW9
1. Colour HU <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5
2. Odour - Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable
3. pH Value - 7.3 7.4 7.2 7.7 7.6 7.4 7.6 7.8 7.4
4. Turbidity NTU <1 <1 <1 <1 <1 <1 <1 <1 <1
5. Conductivity µS/cm 886 924 955 985 964 933 976 869 979
Total 485 398 401

6. 386 394 415
dissolved mg/l 435 390 415
solids
Total 149 151 134
7. mg/l 136 161 158 139 145 151
Hardness
8. Calcium mg/l 36 42 36 37 33 38 36 41 37
9. Magnesium mg/l 10 15 16 12 14 16 18 20 19
10. Chloride mg/l 12 14 16 15 17 17 18 16 15
11. Iron mg/l 0.05 0.08 0.07 0.09 0.08 0.09 0.08 0.11 0.09
12. Sulphate mg/l 9.5 12.1 13.6 13.4 11.8 13 12 10 9.6
13. Sodium mg/l 2.8 3.1 2.6 3.5 3.1 2.5 2.9 3.1 3.0

14. Manganese mg/l <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
15. Copper mg/l <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05
16. Nitrate mg/l 1.8 2.3 2.1 2.4 2.6 1.5 2.2 2.3 2.1
17. Fluoride mg/l 0.14 0.17 0.18 0.14 0.13 0.08 0.09 0.11 0.13
18. Lead mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
19. Zinc mg/l 0.21 0.18 0.12 0.15 0.13 0.12 0.14 0.13 0.11
Hexavalent <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05
20.
Chromium mg/l
Total mg/l 173 159 155 167 171 165 181 177 158
21.
Alkalinity
22. Boron mg/l 0.06 0.12 0.10 0.13 0.11 0.10 0.11 0.09 0.07
23. Potassium mg/l 1.9 1.8 1.8 2.2 2.4 1.3 1.5 2.3 1.7
24. Taste - Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable
25. Mercury mg/l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001
26. Cadmium mg/l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001
27. Arsenic mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
28. Cyanide mg/l <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05
29. Selenium mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
Table 3.11 : Results Of Surface Water Quality At The Monitoring Locations

Jhelum River Jhelum River
S.No. PARAMETER UNIT
Upstream ( SW-1 ) Downstream ( SW-2)
1. pH Value - 7.3 7.7
2. Temperature 0C 10 11
3. Total Dissolved solids mg/l 315 351
4. Total Hardness mg/l 45 61
5. Calcium mg/l 24 26
6. Chloride mg/l 12 26
7. Iron mg/l 0.5 0.8
8. Sulphate mg/l 13 18
9. Copper mg/l <0.05 <0.05
10. Nitrate mg/l 4.1 5.9
11. Fluoride mg/l 1.0 1.2
12. Lead mg/l <0.01 <0.01
13. Zinc mg/l 1.0 1.4
14. Hexavalent Chromium mg/l <0.05 <0.05
15. Total Alkalinity mg/l 80 98
16. Boron mg/l 0.9 1.2
17. Mercury mg/l <0.001 <0.001
18. Cadmium mg/l <0.001 <0.001
19. Arsenic mg/l <0.01 <0.01
20. Cyanide mg/l <0.01 <0.01
21. DO mg/l 12.3 13.8
22. BOD mg/l 2.3 3.6
23. COD mg/l 13 18
24. Oil & Grease mg/l <0.5 <0.5
25. Total Suspended solids mg/l 65 82
26. Phosphorous mg/l 1.7 2.6
Comparing the values of pH, DO, BOD and total coliforms with ‘Use based classification of surface waters’ published by
Central Pollution Control Board; it can be seen that the analyzed surface waters can be compared with class ‘C’ and can
be used for drinking water source after conventional treatment and disinfection, Bacteriological examination of surface
water indicates the presence of total coli forms, which may be due to human activities observed during the study period.
Surface water is mainly alkaline in nature. pH ranges from 7.3 – 7.7. BOD of the surface water found to vary between 12
to 14 mg/l in all the three months. Dissolved oxygen is considerably high in the surface water which shows that water is
clear to a considerable extent.
3.3.5 Land environment
Land is one of the most vital resources for sustenance of life and degradations of land
due to Industrialization, urbanization and population growth is a matter of concern.
Therefore, it is necessary to establish the existing land use pattern to optimize the
land use as well as minimize degradation due to the developmental activities. Also it
is necessary to the landform of the project site and the quality of the soil as soil
erosion further deteriorates the quality of the land.
3.3.5.1 Topography
Pulwama & Srinagar the districts which are influenced by the Growth Centre project
bear a plain topography (being part of the valley surrounded by different mountain
ranges). As regards other geographical features the Srinagar district has geographical
area of 2228 sq.kms and its total reported area is 51007 hectares. The district is
located at an altitude of 1585m from the sea level the Jammu-Leh National Highway
passes through the district. The topography of the district is predominantly plain
except for Kangan block which falls on the Himalayan ranges. As regarded Pulwama,
the district has geographical area of 1398sq.kms.The district is divided into three
zones. Zone-I falling up to 700 Mtrs and zone-II falling between 1700 and 2000 Mtrs
and zone–III falls above 2000 Mtrs. The first zone covers the entire cultivated area of
Pampore and Pulwama Tehsil and major portion of tral and part of Shopain Tehsil
fall in Zone-II. The Higher area of Shopain and Tral Tehsil are covered with forests
extending up to alpine zone.
The ground configuration represents good surface gradient for efficient drainage
system. The average annual rain fall is about 538 millimeter. However, the area is
free from floods. The sufficient quantity of good quality potable ground water is
available in the area.
3.3.5.2 Land use–description

Total land acquired for the project is 6193 kanal. 47% of the study area
(241sq km) surrounding the Industrial Estate is under fallow, which is
mainly used for paddy and saffron cultivation during the cropping season.
Orchard comprises about 24% of total area (123 sq km,) and plantation
20.74% (106sq km) of the total area. The area under built up and the water
courses is around 43sq. km, constituting nearly 80% of the study area. The
area demarcated for the Industrial growth Center also reveals a trend similar
with about 80% belonging to the Fallow category. No forest land is present in
the area.
Objectives of the Study

The objectives of the present study are:
 To map the study area with respect to various land use/land cover change over the
past 10 years.
 To identify the sensitive areas within 10 km radius around the project site.
Methodology opted for land use of 10 km:

The land use/land cover pattern of 10 km has been established on the analysis of the
data received from satellite imagery by making land use/land cover map with the
help of GIS technique. The data based on Census of India, 2001 was referred and land
use study was done within 10 km radius area with limited ground truth verifications.
Ground and ancillary information have been used to identify the sensitive places
within 10 km radius of the project.
Land Use Pattern Classification and description
Two land use/ land cover maps of the area were prepared, one at a coarse scale
covering total area of 513 sq km around the industrial estate. The various land use and
land cover classes includes orchard, plantation, built up, river courses, fallow, mixed
and plantation/orchards. The statistics of each class, in terms of areal coverage, is
shown in Fig. 3.3 and Table 3.11. The details of the land use and land cover within the
IGC are given in the Fig. 3.4 and Table 3.12.
The data analysis revealed that the major proportion of the study area surrounding
the Industrial Estate, spread over an area of 241 sq km (47% of the total area) is
under fallow, followed by orchard (123 sq km, 24% of total area) and plantation
(106sq km, 20.74% total area). The area under built up and the water resources is
around 43sq. km, which comprises nearly 8% of the total area surrounding the
Industrial Estate. It was found, from the field survey and interviews, that most of the
fallow land identified on the satellite image around the Industrial Estate is used for
paddy and saffron cultivation during the cropping season. But at the time of data
acquisition through the satellite, the crop had been either harvested or the land was
lying fallow for that particular cropping season. From the analysis of the satellite data,
it was observed that there is no forest area within the study area spread over 513 sq.
km in and around Lassipora Industrial Growth Center.
Table 3.12: Area under different Land Use/Land Cover Classes in the study Area
Class Name Area % Area

Plantation 106 21
Orchard 123 24
Built up 27 5
River Courses 16 3
Fallow 241 47
Total 513 100
Land Use Pattern
Plantation Orchard Built up

River Courses
Fallow
Fig. 3.5. Area under different Land Use/Land Cover Classes in the study Area
A perusal of the land use/land cover data for the area demarcated for the Industrial
growth Center also reveals a trend similar to that of the whole study area. About 80%
of the land of the IGC belongs to the Fallow category.
Orchard and mixed plantation together form about 11% of the land of the IGC. No
forest land is present in the area as shown in Table 3.19 and Fig. 4.
Table 3.13: Area under different Land Use/Land Cover Classes in the study Area
Class Name Area % Area

Plantation 3.1 1.15
Orchard 13.2 4.90
Built up 16.5 6.13
River Courses 21.4 7.95
Fallow 215.8 79.87
Total 270.0 100.00
Land Use Pattern
Plantation Orchard Built up

River Courses Fallow
Fig. 3.6. Detailed Land Use/Land Cover of IGC, Lassipora

Figure 3.7 : Land Use Map of Project Site

Seismicity - As per the Hazard Risk & Vulnerability Assessment Atlas, the project site
and the surrounding 10 km radius study area lies in zone-IV (High risk Zone)
Fig 3.8: Seismic Zone Map
3.3.5.3 Soil Characteristics

The composite soil samples were collected from site and the study area and were
analyzed for characterization. The locations of the monitoring sites are depicted in
Table 3.14, and Figure 3.6 and the result of the monitoring and analysis is presented
in the Table 3.15.
Methodology

The soil samples were collected in the month of March, April and May 2018 from 9
locations as given in Table 3.14. At each of these locations 9 sub-locations were
identified randomly from where soil was collected from 30 cm below the surface. The
final 9 samples represent homogenously mixed soil from these 9 sub-locations for
each location. The samples were filled in polythene bags, labeled in the field with
number and site name and sent to laboratory for analysis. Soil samples were sealed
and temperature and moisture content were retained. Table 3.13 gives the idea of
the frequency and methodology of selection of soil sampling stations and monitoring
process.
Table 3.14: Frequency and Methodology for Soil Sampling & Monitoring
Particulars Details
Frequency One *grab sample from each station– once
during the Study Period
Methodology Composite grab samples of the topsoil
were collected from 3 depths, and mixed
to provide a representative sample for
analysis.
*Grab sample- a single sample or measurement taken at a specific time or over as
a short period as feasible.
Table 3.15: Soil Sample Collection Points
Soil Sample Collection Points

Code
SQ-1 Project Site Centre 0 Km
SQ-2 Pulwama NNW 9.8 Km
SQ-3 Killora SW 4.128 Km
SQ -4 Aloora SE 3.275 Km
SQ -5 Malangpora NE 2.60 Km
SQ -6 Kach dorah SW 7.9 Km
SQ -7 Shopian SW 1.24 Km
SQ -8 Avantipora NE 11.547 Km
SQ -9 Gundchahal SW 4.33 Km
Fig: 3.9 : Location of Soil Sampling Sites

Table 3.16– Physiochemical characteristics of soil
S.No Parameters Unit S-1 S-2 S-3 S-4 S-5 S-6 S-7 S-8 S-9
1. Color - Brown Dark Dark Dark Brown Brown Dark Dark Dark
Brown Brown Brown Brown Brown Brow
n
2. pH Value 7.8 8.1 7.9 7.9 8.1 8.3 7.7 8.0 7.8
mS/cm
3. Water Holding - 27 29 32 28 27 29 31 29 30
Capacity %
4. Electrical -
0.245
Conductivity 0.241 0.249 0.253 0.253 0.254 0.242 0.251 0.257
0
(mS/cm)
5. Organic matter % 1.2 0.8 1.1 1.2 0.9 1.3 1.1 1.3 1.4
(mg/kg)
6. Texture mg/kg Sandy Clay Sandy Sandy Sandy Sandy Sandy Sandy Sandy Clay Sandy Clay
Clay Clay Clay Clay Clay Clay
7. Porosity mg/kg 0.43 0.49 0.41 0.47 0.42 0.46 0.41 0.51 0.49
(mg/kg)
8. Nitrogen(mg/k mg/kg 159 175 159 161 169 158 175 172 167
g)
9. Potassium mg/kg 10.9 11.3 10.2 12.6 9.9 10.5 12.0 11.9 10.8
(mg/kg)
10. Phosphorus(m mg/kg 71 76 67 71 76 75 80 76 69
g/kg)
Table 3.17 .: STANDARDS FOR SOIL CLASSIFICATION
S. Soil Test Classification

No.
1 pH <4.5 Extremely acidic
4.51- 5.00 Very strongly acidic
5.51-6.0 moderately acidic
6.01-6.50 slightly acidic
6.51-7.30 Neutral
7.31-7.80 slightly alkaline
7.81-8.50 moderately alkaline
8.51-9.0 strongly alkaline
9.01 very strongly alkaline
2 Salinity Electrical Conductivity Upto 1.00 Average
(mmhos/cm) (1mmho/cm = 640 1.01-2.00 harmful to germination
ppm) 2.01-3.00 harmful to crops
3 Organic Carbon (%) Upto 0.2: very less
0.21-0.4: less
0.41-0.5 medium,
0.51-0.8: on an average sufficient
0.81-1.00: sufficient
>1.0 more than sufficient
4 Nitrogen (Kg/ha) Upto 50 very less
51-100 less
101-150 good
151-300 Better
>300 sufficient
5 Phosphorus (Kg/ha) Upto 15 very less
16-30 less
31-50 medium,
51-65 on an average sufficient
66-80 sufficient
>80 more than sufficient
6 Potassium (Kg/ha) 0 -120 very less
120-180 less
181-240 medium
241-300 average
301-360 better
>360 more than sufficient
Physical characteristics of soil were characterized through specific parameters viz

porosity, water holding capacity, pH, electrical conductivity and texture. Soil pH plays

an important role in the availability of nutrients. Soil microbial activity as well as
solubility of metal ions is also dependent on pH. In the study area, variations in the
pH of the soil were found to be little alkaline (7.7 to 8.1). Electrical conductivity (EC)
is a measure of the soluble salts and ionic activity in the soil. In the collected soil
samples the conductivity ranged from 241 to 257 μmhos/cm.
3.3.6 Biological Environment

Biodiversity reflects the potential of a regional ecosystem. Biota of a particular area
is considered as indicators of the environment as they quickly respond not only to
one environmental factor but also an interactive group of factors. These communities
influence and react sensitively to changes in the balance of environmental stresses.
Biological diversity comprises the variability of genus, species and ecosystems and is
very crucial for maintaining the basic processes on which the life depends. On the
basis of biological physiology biodiversity broadly can be divided into two category
i.e. the floral diversity and faunal diversity. Conservation of the biodiversity is
essential for the sustainable development as it not only provides the food, fodder and
medicine, but also contributes to improvement of essential environmental attributes
like air, water, soil, etc. Before starting any Environmental Impact Assessment study,
it is necessary to identify the baseline of relevant environmental parameters which
are likely to be affected as a result of the operation of the project. A similar approach
has been adopted for conducting the study on Biological Environment for this
Project. Both terrestrial and aquatic ecosystems have been studied to understand the
biological environment nearby the project site.
The study was conducted in the project area to assess all possible consequences on
the biological environment. Flora and fauna surveys and data collection conducted
for assessing the biological diversity and its status over a period of time that forms
an integral part of Impact Assessment Techniques. The present study is highlighting
the various issues pertaining to floristic diversity and the faunal wealth in the core
area i.e. Industrial Estate Project at Lassipora, District Pulwama, Kashmir and buffer
zone i.e. area within 10 km radius.
3.3.6.1.1 Description of Study Area

The state of Jammu and Kashmir is hilly and mountainous with many of the
peaks rising over 6100 m amsi. The state is traversed by several conspicuous
parallel NW-SE trending mountain ranges, the chief amongst which are the
Ladakh Range, the Zanaskar Range, Great Himalayan Range, Pir Panjal
Range, Dhauladhar Range, etc. These mountain ranges have imparted multiple
zonations and have also enabled, to a great extent, to demarcate the State into
various administrative units. Jammu forms the Southern part of the state and is
delimited from the Kashmir region by the water shed of the NW-SE trending Pir
Panjal Range and its off-shoot, the northerly trending Saribal Range.
Towards NE, Jammu adjoins the Ladakh region from which it is separated by
the lofty Great Himalayan Range. The boundary between Kashmir and Ladakh
region is also demarcated by The Great Himalayan Range. The Great
Himalayan Range, the Fir Panjal Range and the Saribal Range surround
the Kashmir valley which is the widest and biggest tectonic depression in the
Northwestern Himalayas.
The Lassipora Industrial area, spread over an area of 2.7sq. Km is located in
the Pulwama district of Kashmir province of Jammu and Kashmir . Pulwama,
like any other district in the valley, comprises of plains, uplands and the
mountainous ranges, particularly the Fir Panjal range. The area lies between
Zanaskar and Fir Panjal ranges, which have elevation ranging from 3500 to
5000 meters above mean sea level. They exhibit steep escarpment towards
plains and long gentle slopes towards the valley of Kashmir. The Jhelum,
which is the principal river of the Kashmir valley, flows through the
Northeastern part of the district Pulwama Two important tributaries of the
Jhelum — the Rambiara and the Romshi — drain most part of the district. To
the north of the industrial area lies Koil plateau surrounded by the vast
stretches of low lying plains. Besides, there are number of streams and
nallas draining through various parts of the district. The Industrial Growth
Center is located on the left bank of the river Rambiara.
Fig 3.10: Location Map of IGC Lassipora

The landform map of the area, generated from digital processing of the topographic
data, is shown in Fig.2. The Digital Elevation Model was generated using digital
elevation data of SRTM (Shutter Radar Topographic Mission). From the analysis of
DEM, it was observed that the average elevation of the area is 1638 m, with a
minimum of 1560 m and maximum of 4,500 m, as could be seen from Fig. 12. The
physiographic within the Industrial area is plain having an average elevation of 1675
m above mean sea level.
Fig. 3.11: Location of the Present Project
3.3.6.1.2 CLIMATE AND CLIMATIC ZONES
The Srinagar District has temperate climate. In summer the climate is pleasant with
maximum temperature ranging between 34 oC whereas in winter the minimum
temperature falls below 0o c and in some of the months the average minimum
temperature is recorded around -5 o c. Similar temperature pattern/season pattern is
observed in case of Pulwama district.

As regards rainfall the Srinagar District observed rainfall occurred 640mm in 1991,
715mm in 1993 and 583mmIn the year 1994. The Pulwama district recorded
538mm rainfall in 1991, 785mm in 1993 and 516 in 1994. The region experiences
pleasant climate during April to September whereas remaining period experiences
cold climate with peak winter falling during the months of December to February.
3.3.6.1.3 Soil
The study area has seven soil classes on the texture basis, i.e., silty loam, silt-loamy,
silt loam-loamy, silt loamy calcareous, silt-loam-loam, Rock out crop and loamy soils.
The Lassipora industrial area falls in Karewa uplands physiographic division and in
Gogjipather-Pulwama series. This series is a member of fine loamy, mixed, mesic
family of type Haplustalfs. In general, pH of the soil in the study area, which is mostly
fallow land, varied in the range of 4.47 and 7.43 (very strongly acid to mildly alkaline.
The soil moisture content ranged between 6.10 and 24.63%. Loss on ignition, organic
matter and organic carbon also appear to be of lower range in the soils of Industrial
Estate site as compared to the surrounding areas. A similar trend was revealed by
Total nitrogen and Total Phosphorus.
3.3.6.1.4 Drainage
The Jhelum, which is the principal river of the Kashmir valley, flows through the
Northeastern part of the district Pulwama Two important tributaries of the Jhelum
— the Rambiara and the Romshi — drain most part of the district. To the north of the
industrial area lies Koil plateau surrounded by the vast stretches of low lying plains.
Besides, there are number of streams and nallas draining through various parts of
the district. The Industrial Growth Center is located on the left bank of the river
Rambiara.

3.3.6.2 Methodology
3.3.6.2.1 Period of Sampling
The ecological survey has been conducted during Pre-monsoon season for the
collection of primary data of flora-fauna, vegetation, soil and other environmental
observations. The details are given as below:
Pre-monsoon: March to May
Core zone: At the project site
Buffer zone: Around 10 km radius of the project site
3.3.6.2.2 Mode of Data Collection
Detailed survey was conducted to evaluate floral and faunal composition of the study
area. Primary data on floral and faunal composition was recorded during site visit
and secondary data was collected from the Forest Department and published
relevant literature. Inventory of flora and fauna has been prepared on the basis of
collected data.
3.3.6.3 Biological Component of Core Zone
3.3.6.3.1 Flora
The core zone comprises flat agricultural land where construction operation is
proposed. Some trees are present in the proposed construction area such as
Eucalyptus, Mango, Sal, Neem, Babool, Ber, Sisham, and Safeda along with seasonal
grasses etc. The project shall also not lead to any change in land use of surroundings
except proposed construction area.
3.3.6.3.2 Fauna
Core zone of the construction project is located on flat land. During the field survey,
some domesticated mammal species reported from buffer zone of project site were
common grazing animals like cow, goat and buffaloes etc. Permanent habitat of
mammals and avifauna in the core zone were not observed. There is no any aquatic
habitat in the core zone, so aquatic fauna also does not exist in the proposed
construction area.
3.3.6.4 Biological Component of Buffer Zone
3.3.6.4.1 Flora
3.3.6.4.1.1 Forests
The environs of the Lassipora Industrial Growth Centre are devoid of true natural
forests. National Parks, Sanctuary or Ecologically sensitive areas within the 10 km
periphery of the proposed construction area are not present.
3.3.6.4.1.2. Vegetation in and Around Human Settlement

Most of the area falls under the flood plains of river Rambiara. Vegetation is mainly
comprised of scrubs, plantations of different arboreal species, crop fields and
orchards.
The scrub vegetation in the area is mostly found along the banks of river Rambiara,
and is also supported by the wastelands. It is represented by shrubby elements, such
as Rumex hastatus, Berberis lycium, Rubus ulrnifolius, lndigofera heterantha,
Astragalus grahamianus, and species of Cotoneaster, Rosa, and Myricaria.
The plantations are dominated by various species of Salix and Populus. Besides,
occasional trees of Robinia pseudoacacia, Ailanthus altissima, Platanus orientatlis,
Juglans regia, Celtis australis and Ulmus villosa are also found.
The commonly grown crops include monocultural stands of paddy (Oryza sativa),
mustard (Brassica rapa var. campestris), poppy (Papaver somniferum), oats (Avena
fatua), etc. The vegetables cultivated in the kitchen gardens include turnip (Brassica
rapa), cabbage (Brassica oleracea var. capitata), cauliflower (Brassica oleracea var.
botrytis), carrot (Daucus carota), tomato (Lycopersicon esculentum), radish
(Raphanus, sativus), brinjal (Solanum melongena), spinach (Spinacea oleracea), etc.
The impact zone harbours orchards of almond (Prunus amygdalus), apple (Malus
pumila), pear (Pyrus communis), sweet cherry (Prunus avium), etc. Common
wastelands, graveyards, roadsides, etc. are dominated by herbaceous elements, and
occasionally shrubs. The wide spread herbs include Anagalis arvensis, Anthemis
cotula, Atremisia absinthium, Bromus japonicas, Scandix pectin-veneris, Cannabis
sativa, Capsella bursa-pastoris, Carex sp., Centaurea iberica, Cerastium glorneraturn,
Chenopodium botrys, Cichorium intybus, Cirsium wallichii, Colchicum luteum, Crepis
sancta, Cynodon dactylon, Cyperus rotundus, Daucus carota, Dianthus minima,
Erigeron canadensis, Erodium cicutarium, Euphorbia helioscopia, E. prostrata,
Galinsoga parviflora, Gallium aparine, Geum urbanum, Gnaphalium affine„1-leriniaria
hirsuta, Hordeum vulgare, Hypericum perforatum, Impatiens brachycentra, Lespedeza
cuneata, Lithospermum arvense, Lotus corniculatus, Medicago polymorpha, Mentha
longifolia, Marrubium vulgare, Myosotis arvensis, Oenothera rosea,
Oxalis corniculata, Plantago lanceolata, Poa annua, Poa bulbosa, Polygonum aviculare,
Prunella vulgare, Ranunculus arvensis, Salvia moorcroffiana, Setaria viridis,
Sisymbrium loeselii, Sium latijugum, Stellaria media, Taraxacum officinale, Thymus
linearis, Tribulus terrestris, Trifolium pratense, T. repens, Urtica dioica, Verbascurn
thapsus, Veronica persica, etc.
3.3.6.4.1.3 Terrestrial Flora of the Buffer Zone
Buffer zone of the present project is mainly agricultural land. Several species of
flowering plants were recorded in the respective buffer area of present project. The
collections made during the course of the present study, together with those
recorded in literature, reveal that the study area, which included 536 sq.km in and
around the Lassipora Industrial Growth Center, harbors about 257 species of
vascular plants, belonging to 185 genera in 54 families. Amongst these, the flowering
plants dominate, with dicots sharing 219 species in 153 genera under 44 families,
and monocots 34 species in 28 genera under 6 families. The gymnosperms are
represented by a single species (Cupressus sempervirens), the pteridophytes by 3
species in 3 genera and 3 families.
Based on the number of species, the sequence of the major families is as follows:
Asteraceae > Poaceae > Brassicaceae > Fabaceae > Rosaceae >La mi aceae > Apiaceae
> Polygonaceae > Scrophulariaceae >Caryophyllaceae. Amongst the 54 families found
in the area, the 10 families just mentioned constituted about 65.00% of the total
plant species found in the area. The dicots are represented by about 85.21% species,
whereas the monocots constitute about 13.22% species. The gymnosperms and
pteridophytes are representedby only 1.55% species. Asteraceae (38 spp.) is the
largest family, followed by Poaceae (23 spp.) and Brassicaceae (20 spp). The largest
genus is the Veronica with 6 species.
Table 3.18 . The first 10 large families with their number of species found in and
around Lassipora IGC
S. No. Family No. of species
1. Asteraceae 38
2. Poaceae 23
3. Brassicaceae 20
4. Fabaceae 17
5. Rosaceae 14
6. Lamiaceae 16
7. Apiaceae 12
8. Polygonaceae 10
9. Scrophulariaceae 9
10. Caryophyllaceae 8
Table 3.19: The First Five Large Genera In The Impact Zone Of Lassipora IGC
S. No Genus No_ of species Family
1. Veronica 6 Scrophulariace
2. Artemisia 4 Asteraceae
3. Cyperus 4 Cyperaceae
4. Medicago 4 Fabaceae
Ranunculus 4- Ranunculaceae
Of the total 54 plant families, Brassicaceae, Caryophyllaceae, Apiaceae,

Boraginaceae, Scrophulariaceae, Polygonaceae, and Poaceae are the dominant
herbaceous families, whereas the shrubby species belong to Berberidaceae,
Tamaricaceae and Cupressaceae. Similarly, families such as Juglandaceae,
Hippocastanaceae, Moraceae, Salicaceae, Platanaceae and Ulmaceae are exclusively
represented by tree species. On the other hand, Rosaceae and Fabaceae comprise
diverse habit-forms, whereas Ranunculaceae, Asteraceae, and Lamiaceae are
represented by both shrubby and herbaceous species.
In all, 238 (92.60%) species are herbs, 09 (3.50%) shrubs, and 10 (3.90%) trees.
The percentage of tree and shrubs is lower as there are no natural forests in the
direct and indirect impact zone_ Some of the climbers include Rubia cordifolia
(Rubiaceae) and Convolvulus arvensis (Convolvulaceae).
Trees
Populus ciliata, Platanus orientalis, Salix spp., Jugfans regia, Prunus amygdalus,
Malus pumila, Ulmus villosa, Morus alba, Robinia pseudoacacia, Celtis australis, etc.
Shrubs
Berberis lycium, Rosa brunonii, Rubus ulmifolious, R. anatolicus, Rumex hastatus,
Indigofera heterantha, Astragalus grahamianus, and species of Cotoneaster and
Myricaria.
Herbs
Achyranthes aspera, Allium cepa, Anagalis arvensis, Anthemis cotula, Neslia sp.,
Arctum lappa, Artemisia scoparia, A. vulgare, A. absinthium, Avena futva, Batrachium
sp., Bidens cernua, Brassica oleracea, Brassica rapa, Bromus japonicus, Scandix
pectin-veneris, Cannabis sativa, Capse/la bursa¬pastoris, Carex sp, Carpesium
cernuum, Centaurea iberica, Cerastium glomeratum, Chenopodium botrys, Chorispora
tenella, Cichorium intybus, Cirsium wallichii, Colchicum luteum, Crepis sancta,
Cynodon dactylon, Cyperus rotundus, Daucus ca rota, Dianthus caryophyllus, D.
minima, Dolichos lablab, Echinochloa crus-gallii, Elsholtzia ciliata, Epilobium
hirsutum, Equisetum arvense, Erigeron canadensis, Erodium cicutarium, Euphorbia
helioscopia, E. prostrata, Galinsoga parviflora, Galium aparine, G. palustre, Geranium
pusillum, Geum elatum, G, urbanum, Gnaphalium affine, G. luteo-album, Heriniaria
hirsuta, Hordeum vulgare, Hypericum perforatum, Impatiens spp., Kochia scoparia,
Leonurus cardaica, Lespedeza cuneata, Lithospermum arvense, Lotus corniculatus,
Ma/va neglects, Medicago minima, M. polymorpha, Mentha longifolia, Marrubium
vulgare, Myosotis arvensis, M. sylvatica, Nasturtium officinale, Nepeta cataria,
Oenothera glazioviana, 0. rosea, Oxalis corniculata, Papaver somniferum, Pedicularis
sp., Persicaria sp., Pisum sativum, Plantago lanceolata, P_ major, Poa annua, P.
bulbosa, P. pratensis, Polygonum hydropiper, aviculare, Potentilla spp., PruneIla
vulgare, Ranunculus arvensis, Raphanus sativa, Rorippa islandica, Rubia cordifolia,
Rumex nepalensis, acetosa, Salvia moorcroftiana, Selenium candolii, Setaria viridis,
Siegesbeckia orientalis, Silene conoidea, Sisymbrium, loeselii, Slum latijugum,
Solanum tuberosum, Sonchus arvensis, S. oleraceous, Spergula arvensis, Spinacea
oleracea, SteIlaria media, Taraxacum officinale, Thymus linearis, Tragopogon
kashmeriana, Tribulus terrestris, Trifolium pratense, T repens, Urtica dioica,
Verbascum thapsus, Verbena officinale, Veronica anaga/is-aquatica, V. biloba, V.
persica, Vicia sativa and Vulpia myorus.
Diversity of cryptogrammic plants

As the direct and indirect impact zone of the Lassipora Industrial Estate mostly
constitutes exposed habitats with less soil moisture, the lower plants which prefer
shady habitats are uncommon. A brief summary of the cryptogamic plant species
collected in the field during the course of present study and supplemented with
those reported previously by some workers from this area is given below.
a. Pteridophytes
These are spore bearing vascular plants which mostly include ferns and fern allies.
They preferably inhabit moist and shady habitats. Some of the plant species of this
group recorded from this region include: Equisetum arvensis, Marsilea quadrifoliata,
Adiantum capilius-veneris and Dryopteris blanfordii.
b. Bryophytes
Bryophytes are spore bearing non-vascular plants, forming dense green mats in
moist and shady places. These are categorized into two subgroups, viz. liverworts
and mosses.
c. Liverworts
The species of liverworts collected from the study area include: Marchantia
polymorpha, Metzgeria conjuguta, Pellia endivaefolia, and Ricciafluitans.
d. Mosses
Some of the common moss species recorded from the catchment area include:
Brachythecium populeum, Bryum schleicheri, Funaria hygrometrica, Grimmia ovalis,
Mnium lycopodiodes, Polytrichum juniperinum, etc.
e. Lichens
Lichens are living organisms, in which the body consists of two symbiotic partners,
viz., an algal partner preparing food and the fungal partner providing protection.
Although, lichens occur on woody plants and rock outcrops throughout the valley,
their species diversity is least explored in this region. Some of the commonly known
lichen species recorded from the study area includes species of Dermatocarpa,
Lecanora, Parmelia, Rhizoplaea, Stereocaulon and Xanthoria.
Economically important plants
A large number of plants are exploited for their economic importance in the
catchments area.
Commonly cultivated plants

Several plant species of economic value to the local populace, as enumerated below,
are cultivated in the direct and indirect impact zone as cereals, pulses, oil-seed crops,
vegetables, horticultural and plantation purposes.
a. Cereals
Rice (Oryza sativa), maize (Zea mays) and wheat (Triticum aestivum).
b. Pulses (legumes)
Soyabean (Glycine max), french bean (Phaseolus vulgaris), garden pea (Pisum
sativum), black gram (Vicia mungo), green gram (V. radiata) and broad bean (V. faba).
c. Oil seed plants
The most common plant species grown for oil-yielding seeds is field mustard
(Brassica rapa subsp. campestris). Some other species include: sunflower (Helianthus
annuus) and linseed (Linum usitatissimum).
d. Vegetables
Turnip (Brassica rapa), cabbage (Brassica oleracea var. capitata), cauliflower
(Brassica oleracea var. botrytis), squashes (Cucurbita maxima and C. moschata),
carrot (Daucus carota), bottle gourd (Lagenaria siceraria), tomato (Lycopersicon
esculentum), mallow (MaIva sylvestris), radish (Raphanus sativus), potato (Solanum
tuberosum), brinjal (S. melongena), spinach (Spinacea oleracea), fenugreek
(Trigonella foenum-graecum) and onion (Allium cepa).
e. Horticultural plants
The area is rich in different cultivars of apples (Malus pumila), pears (Pyrus
communis) and almonds (Prunus amygdalus)_ Besides, other plant species of
horticultural importance are: walnut (Juglans regia), apricot (Prunus armeniaca),
sweet cherry (P. avium), sour cherry (P. cerasus), plum (P. domestica), peach (R
persica), grapes (Vitis vinifera), mulberry (Morus alba), quince (Cydonia oblonga) and
spanish chestnut (Castanea sativa).
Medicinal plants
The local inhabitants over the years have learnt to utilize plants for treating various
ailments. Thus, a large number of plant species growing in this area are used for
medicinal purposes. A list of common medicinal plant species in the Lassipora direct
and indirect impact zone along with their medicinal importance is given in Table 4.4.
About 36 species of medicinal plants are used for treating ailments, such as asthma,
boils, constipation, diarrhoea, dysentery, rheumatism, cardiac and respiratory
complaints, cold, cough, fever, toothache, cholera, ulcer, skin diseases, wounds and
injuries, expulsion of worms, chest infections, and hysteria, etc.
Table 3.20: List of medicinal plant species with their medicinal importance
from the Lassipora Direct and indirect impact zone
S. No Medicinal importance
Species name
1. Achillea millefolium Decoction used as diaphoretic,

stimulant, tonic, and also in
colds
2. Aesculus indica Fruit cathartic
3. Arctium lappa Roots diuretic and diaphoretic.
4. Artemisia scoparia Yields scoparine, highly effective
as hypotensive and
tranquilizing agent.
5. Astragalus Roots used to relieve toothache.
grahamianus
6. Berberis lycium Root extract used as gargle in

toothache; berries coagulant,
astringent and a remedy for
7 Colchicum luteum Corms yield colchicines; used in
8. Datura stramonium Leaves and seeds useful in
bronchitis / asthma;
antispasmodicand narcotic

9. Erodium cicutarium Used as uterine-sedative and
1 Euphorbia Roots anthelmintic; seeds with
helioscopia are given in cholera.

11 Fumaria indica Extract taken as a cooling agent.
12 Galium aparine Extract used as diuretic and antiscorbutic.
13 Hypericum Extract in olive oil used externally for
perforatu sores, wounds, ulcers, and swellings.
m
14 lsodon rugosus Extract of leafy twigs used as an eye-wash.
15 Lychnis coronaria Root decoction used in lung
and liver
16 MaIva neglecta Laxative and expectorant.
17 Marrubium vulgare Leaf paste applied to boils and in rheumatism.
18 Mentha longifolia Dried leaves used as carminative, stimulant,
and a l s o a s f l a v o u r i n g a g e n t
19 Nepeta cataria Leaf deCoction curative in dysentery, leaves
chewed to cure toothache.
20 Oxalis corniculata Effective in treatment of boils.
21 Plantago lanceolata Leaf extract taken as a cooling
22 Plantago major drink. Seeds used as laxative.
23 Polygonum Roots astringent, used in menorrhagia.
amplexicaule
24 Portu/aca oleracea Seeds used as vermifuge.
25 Prunella vulgaris Decoction of flowers antineuralgic
26 Ranunculus For treating fever, gout, and asthma.
arvensis
27 Rosa webbiana Paste of petals curative in chest infections. .
28 Rubia cordifolia A good skin ointment obtained from the root
paste.
29 Salix alba. Yields Acetyl salicylic acid (aspirin), the
prized herbal drug for rheumatism and for
dissolving blood clots in arteries and veins in
30 Salvia Roots given in colds and cough; seeds
moorcroftian emetic, curative in hemorrhoids; leaf paste
a applied to cure boils.
31 Taraxacu Expectorant; leaf decoction fed to
m convalescent mothers after delivery.
officinale
32 Thymus linearis Used to cure weak vision,complaints of
stomach, chest and liver, also for suppression
of urine and menstruation.

33 Tribulus terrestris Fruit diuretic, root extract used as purgative.
34 Tulipa stellata Extract of bulbs used as tonic.
35 Urtica dioica Extract of young leaves and
inflorescence diuretic and stomachic.
36 Verbascum thapsus Applied locally to cure bums; leaves used in
smoking.
Intensive field surveys undertaken during the present study and perusal of the
relevant literature revealed that no endemic species among the 152 endemic plant
species reported in the Kashmir Himalaya (Dar & Aman, 2004), occurs in the
Lassipora direct and indirect impact zone.
Threatened plant species

A perusal of the floristic literature of this region revealed that of the 350 species of
threatened plants in the Kashmir Himalaya (Dar & Naqshi, 2001) only three (03)
species also occur in the present study area (Table 3.21).
Table 3.21: Threatened plant species collected from the Direct and indirect
impact zone of Lassipora IGC.
S. No. Species name Local Family *T
name hre
1. Chorispora tenella DC. - Brassicaceae Vulnerab
2. Cotulaanthemoides Bobul . Brassicaceae Endangere
DC. d
3. Tribulus terrestris L. MitsariKond Zygophyllaceae Endangere
d
3.3.6.4.1.4. Aquatic Flora of the Buffer Zone

Aquatic flora are referred as phytoplankton and macrophytes (Plants that have
adapted to living in aquatic environment such as River, lakes, Ponds, dams). During
the present investigation, some Phytoplankton and Macrophytic vegetation were
collected from Jhelum River and others streams present in the buffer area is given in
Table 3.22..
Table 3.22: Distribution Pattern Of Phytoplankton At Different Study Sites
S.No Name of S.No Name Species

Species
1. Achnanthes spp 21. Navicula
radiosa
2. Amphora ovalis 22. Nitzschia ovalis
3. Bidulphia spp. 23. Nitzschia spp.
4. Coconesis spp. 24. Pinularia spp
5. Cyclotella spp. 25. Stauroneis spp.
6. Cymbella affinis 26. Synedra ulna
7. Cymbella spp. 27. Tabellaria spp.
8. D.elongatum 28. Surirella spp.
9. Diatoma spp Chlorophyceae
10. Epithemia spp. 29. Closterium spp.
11. Eunotia spp. Cosmarium spp.
12. Fragillaria spp. 30. Desmidium spp.
13. Gomphonema 31. Hydrodictyon
germinatum spp.
14. Gomphonema 32. Pediastrum spp.
spp.
15. Melosira spp. 33. Scenedesmus
spp.
16. Melosira varians Cyanophycea
17. Meriodon spp. 34. Microcystis spp.
18. N.cuspidata 35. Euglenophyceae
19. N.denticula 36. Euglena acus
20. Navicula radiosa
3.3.6.4 Fauna of the Buffer Zone

The major part of the buffer zone of present project lies under agriculture field which
restrict the wildlife habitat significantly. There is no any wildlife sensitive corridor
present for the movement of wildlife animals. A list of animals of the study area has
been prepared on the basis of present survey, inquiry from local people and from the
available published literatures. The animals thus recorded were cross checked with
Wildlife Protection Act (1972) for their schedule.
Mammals
Domesticated mammal species like Cow, Goat and Buffalo etc. were noticed in the
buffer zone. During present survey and Inquiry from village people regarding wild
animals reveals that Fruits bat and Indian Fox etc. are often seen in the area.
Invertebrate Fauna
The macro-invertebrate taxa recorded during the field surveys are given in Table
3.23. As is evident from the data the soil macro-invertebrates are dominated by
insects, Lepidoptera and Orthoptera being the main contributors. Others included
helipterums, homopterous, dipterans, arachnids and oligochaetes. All the species
encountered are of wide distribution in the region. No taxa were of endemic nature.
Table 3.23: Terrestrial Macro-Invertebrate fauna recorded in and around

Lassipora IGC, Pulwama
S.No Names
Oligochaeta (Annelida)
1 Lumbricus terrestris
Arthropoda
Lepidoptera (Insecta)
2 Agalais urticase (small tortoise shell)
3 Pieris brassicase (Large white)
4 Venessa carduii (painted lady)
5 Lycaena phlaeas L.(small copper)
6 Plebejus argus L. (Silver-studed blue)
Orthoptera (insecta)
7 Acrida exaltata
8 Dicranophyma babaulti
9 Oxya hyla
10 Trilophidia annulata
Diptera (insecta)
11 Asilius sp
Hymenoptera (insecta)
12 Bombus sp.
Hemipotera (insecta)
13 Cicada sp.
Araneida (Arachnida)
14 Aranius sp
15 Herphyllus goansis
16 Lycosa sp.
17 Pardosa sp.
Lower Vertebrate Fauna

The amphibian fauna of the region was very limited and was represented by one frog
(Rana cyanophlictis) and one toad (Bufo viridis). Both these are of wide distribution.
The reptile diversity is also reported to be very limited being represented by one
lizard, two poisonous snake (Pit viper and Pit less viper) and two nonpoisonous
snakes. All the species have wide distribution (Table 3.24).
Table 3.24 : Lower vertebrates found in and around Lassipora IGC
S.No Names
Amphibia (Anura)
1 Rana cyanophlictes
2 Bufo viridis
Lacertillia (Reptillia)
3 Agama tuberculata
Ophidia (Reptilia)
4 Agkistrodon himalayanus
5 Russella vipera
6 Natrix sp.
7 Ptyas mucosus
Higher Vertebrates
Twenty four species of birds, belonging to 15 families, were recorded from the study
area_ Bird diversity in the area varied seasonally. Family wise corvidae was found to
be dominant with a contribution of four species followed by muscicapidae with three
species. The contribution of various families to the avifauna of the locality is depicted
in Table 3.25, Table 3.26 . Maximum of 57 four species belonged to Corvidae followed
by three species by Muscicapidae.
Besides the common sightings of domestic animals belonging to the livestock
category (Cattle, Sheep, Horses, Domestic Fowl, Domestic Ducks, Geese, Street Dogs,
Cats etc.) infrequent visits of the area by such wild animals as Black Bear
(Selenarctos thibatanus), Jackals (Canis aureus), and Leopards (Panthera pardus)
have been reported (interviews of local elderly people). Presence of Herpestes nyula
(Common Mongoose) and Field Mouse or House Rat has also been reported from the
area_ Occurrence of Lutra lutra (Common Otter) on the banks of Rambiara was also
confirmed by the local inhabitants.
3.3.6.4.3 Avian Fauna

Table No. 3.25. A List Of Birds Observed In The Buffer Zone Of Proposed Project
S. No. Scientific Name Family Common Migrator
Name y/
1. Acridotheres tristis tristis (Sturnidae) R
Common Myna
2. Carpodacus etythrinus. (Fringillidae) Rose Finch M
3. Corvus (Corvidae) Jungle Crow R
macrorhynchos
intermedius
4. C. monedula (Corvidae) Jackdaw R
5. C. splendens (Corvidae) House Crow R
6. Columba palumbes Gmelin (Columbidae Rock Pigeon '
7. Cuculus canorus (Cuculidae) Asiatic Cucoo M
8. Falco subbuteo (Falconidae) Falcon R
9. Garrulax lineatus lineatus (Muscicapida Streaked Laughing R
e) Thrush
10. Hirundo rustica (Hirundinida Ababeel M

11. Lanius schachs (Lanidae) Rufous-backed Shrike M
12. Milvus migrans (Falconidae) Black Kite R
13. Pycnonotus leucogenys (Pycnonotid White-cheeked R
14. Myiophonus coeruleus (Corvidae) Himalayan Blue R
15. Oriolus oriolus Kundoo (Oriolidae) Golden Oriole M
16. Picus squamata (Picidae) Green Wood
17. Picoides maharatensis (Picidae) Spotted Wood R
18. Parus major (L.) (Paridae) Tit R
19. Passer domesticus parkini (Ploceidae) House Sparrow R
20. Phylloscopus inomatus (Muscicapid WilloW Warbler R
21. Streptopelia decaocta (columbidae Ring-necked M
22. Sturnus vulgaris humii (Sturnidae) Himalayan M
23. Turdus unicoloris (Muscicapid Tickl's Thrush R
24. Upupa epops (L.) (Upupidae) Hud Hud M
Table No. 3.26. The Contribution Of Various Families To The Avifauna Of The
Locality
S. No. Family Number of species
1. Corvidae 4
2. Muscicapidae 3
3. Satumidae 2
4. Columbidae 2
5. Falconidae 2
6. Picidae 2
7. Cuculidae 1
8. Pycnonotidae 1
9. Oriolidae 1
10. Paridae 1
11. Plocidae 1
12. Upupidae 1
13. Hirundinidae 1
14. Lanidae 1
15. Fringillidae 1
3.3.6.4.4 Aquatic Fauna

Zooplankton is commonly found in all types of aquatic habitats. These are recognized
as secondary producers and considered as one of the best tools for environmental
monitoring programme. During the present survey zooplankton diversity of different
habitats was assessed.
Macro-invertebrates
Macro-invertebrates are commonly found in all types of aquatic habitats such as
streams, rivers, wetlands, lakes and ponds. These animals generally include insects,
crustaceans, molluscs and annelids. They are significant within the food chain as
larger animals such as fish and birds rely on them as a food source. Various macro-
invertebrate species were collected and identified from different habitats present in
the buffer zone of present project is given in Table 3.27.
Macro- invertebrates constitute an important link between the micro – consumers
and the fish and determine the success of detritus based fishery in an aquatic system.
Macro invertebrates in the present study included arthropods, leach and gastropods.
Arthropods included two classes’ i.e. insecta and amphipods. Ephemeroptera,
Trichoptera, Diptera and coleopteran contributed to insecta.
Table 3.27. Various macro-invertebrate species present in the buffer zone of present
project
Amphipoda
1 Gammarus spp
Insecta (Ephemeroptera)
2 Batiella spp
3 Baetis rhodoni
4 Drunella spp
5 Ephemerella spp
6 Ecdyonurus spp
(Trichoptera)
7 Stenopsychae spp.
8 Nectopsychae spp.
9 Hydropsyche
(Diptera)
10 Diamesa
11 Atherix
12 Chironomous
(Coleoptera)
13 Elmidae
(Hirudinea)
14 Erpobdella
(Gastropoda)
15 Lymnaea
According to Hawkes (1979) Ephemeroptera and Trichoptera do not tolerate organic

enrichment. The dominance of these two groups at all the sampling sites reflects the
unpolluted State of this water. Gaufin (1957) and Reddy and Rao (2001) have
inferred that an association of may fly stone fly and caddis fly in a water body is
indicative of clean water and their absence often denotes a super abundance of
organic wastes and low oxygen supply. They further stated that in the waters
receiving large amount of organic wastes, insects belonging to hemiptera,
coleopteran and Diptera are best represented. Learner et al. (1971) and Hawkes
(1979) have reported that among annelids, oligochaetes are favored by organic
enrichment and are often dominant invertebrates in severely polluted conditions.
The presence of annelids at certain sites can related to increasing organic wastes,
high temperature and high nutrients. Mollusca were represented by Lymnaea
(Gastropod.). The Maximum contribution of snails to the benthos was recorded
indication that the occurrence and abundance of Lymnaea is directly with the
increased level or organic matter at these springs.
Fishes
Buffer area of Present Construction project comprises several River/ Streams which
supports some fish species. List of fauna present in the different water bodies in the
buffer zone of present construction project (Lassipora) are listed in Table 3.28.
During the present survey a total of five fish species were collected from the four
study sites, which included Schizothorax plagiostomus, S. esocinuss, S. Labiatus,
Triplophysa kashmirensis and Triplophysa marmorata summer season. The fishes
collected from the present survey from the Rambiara stream and its tributary and
the adjoining spring are all typical hill stream fishes. These fishes have special
anatomical modifications in their body and mouth for adhering to the bottom in
rapids and the mouth structures specially adapted for feeding purposes.
Plagiostomus being bottom feeder mostly feeds on bottom algae while S.esocinus and
Triplohysa spp. are primarily carnivorous fish and feed on the bottom fauna.
S.labiatus is an omnivore and feeds on bottom algae and fauna.
Table 3.28. Percent Composition Of Fishes Found In The Project Area

S.No Fish
1 S.plagiostomus
2 S.esocinus
3 S.labiatus
4 T.kashmirensis
5 T.marmorata
3.3.6.5 Agricultural Land

Agriculture is the predominant occupation in Panchkula District but it mostly
dependent on monsoon. This region is characterized as low rainfall and dry with vast
marginal lands. Agro-climatically a number of crops can be grown in Pulwama
district but major portion of cultivable land is occupied by saffron, paddy, orchard
and plantations. The significant area shift towards these crops reflects their
respective profitability and ease with which these crops can be cultivated as per land
suitability.
3.3.6.6. Occurrence of Schedule-I and Rare, Endangered and Threatened

Species (RET)
Overall studies of present construction project of Lassipora (District Pulwama)
reveal that,

Schedule-I species as well as plant species under the category of RET were not
observed from the buffer and core zone. However, all care will be taken for
protection of others flora & fauna also, if any in the lease hold area.

EIA for the upgradation and expansion of CETP of 600 KLD to 1100 KLD capacity and
implementation of SLF at Industrial Growth Centre, Lassipora, District-Pulwama, J&K
by M/s J& K SIDCO.
CHAPTER -4
ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATION
MEASURES
4.0 Introduction
This chapter discusses identification and appraisal of various environmental impacts due
to the Industrial Estates. Generally, the environmental impacts can be categorized as direct,
indirect and cumulative. Direct impact occurs through direct interaction of an activity with
an environmental, social or economic component.
Indirect impact on the environment is those which are not a direct result of the project
often produced away from the impact pathway. As a project in the same vicinity of other
project than impacts occur when the incremental impact of the project is combined with
the cumulative effect of other past, present and future projects.
The development, construction and functional phase of the project comprise various
activities, each of which may have some impact on physical, ecological and socio-economic
environment.
Various impacts during the development, construction and operation phase on the
environmental parameters have been studied to estimate the impact on environment and
minimizing the adverse impact and thereafter enhance the beneficial impacts on
environment quality both during pre and post project. Suitable approach and methodology
was adopted to ascertain likely impacts both during design and construction and operation
stage.
Prediction of impacts is the most important component of an EIA study. Many scientific
techniques and methodologies are available to predict impacts on physico-ecological and
socio-economic environment. The prediction of impacts helps to identify the gaps and
implementation of environmental management plan during and after the execution of the
developmental activity to minimize the deterioration of environmental quality.
The selection of the factors require due consideration to;

a) The extent to which the action will cause environmental effects in excess of those
created by existing uses in the area affected by it.
b) The absolute quantitative environmental effects of the action itself, including the
cumulative harm that results from its contribution to existing adverse conditions or
uses in the affected area.
c) The extent to which the proposed action is consistent with local development plans
In the present study, the most probable impacts on various components of the surrounding
environment due to the proposed development have been predicted.
The impacts studied have been classified as under-
a) Positive and negative impacts – an action will result in significant environmental
impacts all of which are either beneficial or adverse (undesirable).
b) Primary and secondary impacts – primary impacts covers those which are
direct fallout of the proposed project and that generally occur at the same time or place
as the action (and are generally obvious and quantifiable). Secondary impacts are
indirect or induced changes (as a result of chain of consequences) due to the
project/action.
Secondary impacts span the potential effects of additional changes that are likely to
occur later in time or at a different place as a result of implementation of a particular
action.
Cumulative impacts result from the incremental impact of the proposed action
on a common resource when added to other past, present, and reasonable foreseeable
future action.
Scope of the impacts -
i) Temporal – this analyse the impact on basis of its bearing on time scale depending
on persistence or duration of the impacts. The impact may be immediate
(immediate consequence of the action which may or may not persist over time),
term (takes place continuously over a period of time till action continues), or
chronic (get manifested at a later stage due to accumulated effect over time).
ii) Spatial – the impact can effect immediate work area (within the complex of the
proposed project), in the vicinity – outside boundary, and far and wide area around the
project site.
iii) Frequency – whether the impact is continuous (always there during project
operation), sporadic (the impact is irregular due to some activity or situation which is
random or infrequent), or accidental (it may be due to some uncontrolled
happening resulting into accident).
Control/mitigation possibilities – These include various options for minimizing damage

to the environment, which include, avoidance (no action – mitigation by not carrying out
proposed project/action), minimization (mitigation by scaling-down the magnitude of the
project, reorienting the layout of the project, or employing pollution prevention or cleaner
production technology and procedures that reduces factors generating the undesirable
environmental impact), restoration (mitigation by restoration of the environments affected
by the action), reduction (mitigation by taking control, prevention, or maintenance steps
during the course of the action), compensation (mitigation through the creation of
environments similar to those affected by the action).
e) Controversial status – impending public controversy (disagreement among the

public groups or concerned/affected individuals about the purpose, need, or location
of the action) or historical proneness to arouse public controversy is an important
aspect needing specific attention.
f) Sensitivity – the actions encroaching sensitive environmental resources need specific

consideration. Sensitive natural resources may be certain natural environments (such as,
major wetland complexes – inland or coastal, floodplains of major rivers, wildlife
reserves/habitats, large tracts of prime agricultural land, or regions with extensive and
important cultural, or unique resources) or “sensitive receptors” in the affected area.
Impact Identification Matrix

Environmental Attributes
Project Activity Ground
Land Use Surface Air Noise Ecology Aesthetics
Soil & Earth water
water
quality
Construction Phase
Site Clearing √ √ √ √ √ √
Excavation and embankment √ √ √ √ √

Construction of water distribution √ √ √ √ √ √
networks
Construction of storm water network √ √ √ √ √
Construction of wastewater √ √ √ √ √ √ √
treatment plant
Development of Haulage Road √ √ √ √
Quarrying √ √ √ √
Construction of laying of roads √ √ √ √
Construction of Industrial units √ √ √ √

Operational Phase
Operation of DG sets
Operation of Machine
Vehicular movement √
Solid waste disposal √ √
Wastewater disposal √ √

implementation of SLF at Industrial Growth Centre, Lassipora, District-Pulwama, J&K
by M/s J& K SIDCO.
4.1 AIR ENVIRONMENT –

4.1.1 Construction Phase –
Impacts - Due to the capability of the ambient air to return to its original form once
activities that generate air emissions are stopped, impacts on the air environment are
necessarily transient and temporary owing to the time bound nature of construction work.
A number of sources in construction phase that cause potential impacts on air quality,
which include:
 Dust and air emission particularly due to the excavation, construction and
movement of vehicles resulting in air pollution.
 Dust and other exhaust atmospheric emissions generated by vehicle movement,
concrete mixing machinery, concrete conveyers, bucket conveyers, air bowers.
 Particulate emission due to machinery and instrument operation for cleaning and
construction works.
 Fumes and gases near the work area due to welding activities.
 Emission due to excavation, cutting, heating, welding and vehicle movement.
 Generation of fumes and exhaust gases.
 Dust emission due to removal of scrap materials, remaining and waste construction
materials, construction machinery, dismantling and removal of temporary
structures, site cleaning and disposal of these materials.
Mitigation Measures
Mitigation measures for air quality impacts during construction phase are:
 Periodical checking of vehicles and construction machinery to ensure compliance of
emission standards.
 Attenuation of pollution /protection of receptor through greenbelt/green cover.
 Ensure periodical washing of construction equipment and transport vehicles to
prevent accumulated dust.

4.1.2 Operation Phase –
Impacts –
Being a project of Common Effluent treatment Plant there will not be any need of
combustion process except occasional operation of DG set in case of failure of power. Hence
there will not be any regular and continuous point source of flue gas emission. However
because of movement of tankers for receiving effluent there will be minor impact on
ambient air quality.
Considering the type of industrial effluent to be received the chances of odour nuisance of
chemicals will not be likely to be there. But because operation of biological treatment plant
and sludge drying process to certain extent there may be chance of odour nuisance.
Mitigation Measures
Mitigation measures for air quality during operation phase are:

 Attenuation of pollution/protection of receptor through greenbelt/green cover.
 The generators would be provided with a stack of proper height (as per
Environment (P) Rules, 1986, item 96) for the proper dispersal of pollutants emitted
from the stack.
 Dilution of odorant, odor counter action or neutralize, odor masking or blanketing
 Regular monitoring of air polluting concentrations
 Control vehicle speed on sight.
 DG Sets will be operated during power failure only.
 Aromatic plants shall be planted in the proposed green belt area in order to control
odor related problems.
4.2 NOISE ENVIRONMENT –
During the construction phase of project, noise will be generated from the various
sources. Some major sources of noise generation at project site are listed here under:
 Generation of noise during movement of vehicles carrying materials, loading
and unloading activities.
 Generation of noise from excavation machines, concrete mixer and other
construction machines,
 Generation of noise during the operation of D.G. Set
 Generation of noise during concreting, hammering, etc.
Mitigation Measures
Provision of Personal Protective equipment (PPE) such as muffles/plugs etc. to the
workers.
 Acoustic enclosures to be provided for compressors for drills and rock cutter.
 All construction equipment shall be fitted with noise control measures.
 Servicing of all construction vehicles and machinery to be done regularly and during
routine servicing operation, the effectiveness of exhaust silencers will be checked
and if found defective to be replaced.
 Vehicle for bringing construction material at site shall conform to the noise emission
standards and to be operated during non-peak hour.
 Construction work will be carried out during day time only.
 Ambient noise level monitoring shall be conducted at suitable locations at periodic
intervals during construction phase to conform to the stipulated standards during
both day and night time. Data shall be reviewed and analyzed by the project
manager for adhering to any strict measures.

Impacts - During the operation phase, the sources of noise shall be equipments such as
waste treatment machinery, pumps, aerators, agitator, blowers & Diesel Generator Sets.
Mitigation Measures -
Noise limit for diesel generator sets (up to 1000 KVA) manufactured on or after the 1st
July, 2004 is given as: “The maximum permissible sound pressure level for new diesel
generator (DG) sets with rated capacity up to 1000 KVA, manufactured on or after the 1st
July, 2004 shall be 75 dB(A) at 1 m from the enclosure surface. The diesel generator sets
should be provided with integral acoustic enclosure at the manufacturing stage.
 Use of suitable muffler systems/enclosures/sound-proof glass paneling on
heavy equipment/pumps/blowers
 DG set for backup power to be provided with adequate acoustic enclosure and to be
fitted with muffler to reduce the noise in adherence with the regulatory equipment.
 The noise producing machinery will be placed in acoustic enclosures/acoustic
rooms to reduce the noise levels.
 Workers working near noisy area shall be provided with ear plugs.
 Usage of well-maintained construction equipment meeting the regulatory standards
 Periodic maintenance of equipments/replacing whenever necessary/lubrication of
rotating parts, etc.
 To have the provisions of noise barriers in form of dense green belt around the
periphery. Shrubs can reduce noise by about five to ten decibels-or about 50 percent
as perceived by the human ear.
4.3 WATER ENVIRONMENT –

Impacts -
 Surface water quality is likely to be affected due to soil erosion during first rain and
generation of wastewater mainly from construction labor camp.
 Surface runoff from project Site, oil/fuel and waste spills. Improper debris disposal.
 The wastewater produced from labour colony may be a concern for the public
health.
 Runoff related to unpaved and excavated areas during the rain shower.
 Run off related to area where lubricant, fuel and other materials are stored,
used and disposed off.
 Ground water quality would be polluted by debris, soil excavation and waste
generation.
 During construction and operation phase no ground water will be excavated so,
impact on the ground water hydrology will be insignificant.
Mitigation Measures
 During the construction phase, the modular septic tanks will be provided.
 Excavation during dry season and management of excavated soils.
 Clearing all debris from site as soon as construction is over.
 Care will be taken to securely store the excavated material and to reuse it as early as
possible in construction or for land filling during landscaping.
 Hazardous chemicals as waste Oil will be handled properly.
 Storm water drainage system to collect surface runoff.
 Exposed stockpiles should be covered with tarpaulin or impervious sheet before a
rainstorm occur.
4.3.2 Operation Phase

Impacts –
 Possibility of contamination of the ground water system due to storing of

oily wastes.
 Positive impact in terms of utilization of treated water for horticulture &
agricultural purpose to meet the eco-friendly system.
Mitigation Measures
 Storing of oily wastes in lagoons should be minimized in order to avoid possible

contamination of the ground water system.
 The treated effluent from CETP will be recycled and reused to the maximum extent.
 Domestic wastewater from industrial areas and from office/canteen will be treated
along with industrial effluent stream.
 CETP will be constructed with strong foundation and water proof strong RCC
work to avoid any seepage and with enough free paces to avoid spillage.
 The heterogeneous complex character of different industries with wide spectrum of
refractive pollutants makes it difficult to meet the stipulated standards all the time.
Moreover at present, the discharge standard is highly relaxed with BOD 30mg/l and
COD 250 mg/l, whereas TDS, turbidity and colour intensity are in a much relaxed
stage. The proposed CETP will meet the stringent parameter of BOD (10 mg/l) and
COD (150 mg/l), in addition to make the treated water highly transparent bringing
down the TDS level much below, while successfully dealing with de-colorization
phenomenon.
4.4 LAND ENVIRONMENT

Impact of any project on Land environment can be because of air pollution, Water
(effluent) and solid wastes (hazardous). Impact can be direct or indirect. It can be
beneficial or harmful. Impact can be at construction &operational stage.

The project site is primarily dominated by undergrowth and unwanted bushes. Soil will be
excavated at project site for foundations of industrial & other development.
Impacts –
 There will be change in land use pattern.

 Overburden and construction waste, if not properly stacked, may pollute the soil.
 The top soil will be stripped from constructional areas and stockpiled for later reuse
in landscaping.
 To ensure against any chances of soil pollution, it is imperative to establish a
well planned solid waste collection system covering all areas of the project site.
Mitigation Measures -
 The project site is an open area without vegetation or human activity, and is allotted
for the development of CETP; therefore there will not be any impact on the present
land use pattern of the area.
 The overburden and construction waste will be reused as early as possible in the
construction and for land filling during landscaping of project site.
 Proper drainage system shall be provided to deal with the storm water in case of
rain.

Impacts –
 Hazardous chemical sludge produced during the wastewater treatment such as
chemical sludge from waste water treatment from CETP, leachate, used spent oil &
empty container and barrels may contaminate the soil if not handled properly.
 Due to undetected or neglected leakage, it is possible that soils can get contaminated
around the area from where pipeline is passing.
Mitigation Measures –
 Record of sludge disposal shall be kept as per Hazardous Waste (Management,
Handling and Trans-boundary) Rules, 2008 and amended thereof.
 Precaution should be taken for all liquid and solid waste during storage and
transport so that soils around the site and within 10 Km radius are not
contaminated.
 Primary sludge in some of the cases may contain some toxic elements such as
arsenic, cadmium, nickel etc. but the primary sludge is reduced by the way of
segregation of the major quantum of bio-sludge going to be generated. The fewer
quantum of generation of hazardous waste & application of decanters will help the
CETP operators for its direct disposal at TSDF site.
 Treated effluent generated will be suitable for horticulture & agricultural purpose.
Before use the water will be analyzed for EC, pH and water having pH value between
6.5 to 7.5 and EC below 2 mhhos/cm is to be only used. if water below 6.5 or above
7.5 pH and EC > 2 mmhos is used, after sustained use salinity or alkalinity may
develop in soils.
 Regular soil samples will be collected around the area from where underground
pipeline is passing and will be tested for any impact on pH, EC and physical and
chemical properties of soils.
 Hazardous chemical sludge produced during the wastewater treatment will be
handled in decanter and disposed to authorized Solid Waste Management Facility
and will have no impact.
4.5 ECOLOGICAL ENVIRONMENT -

There is no loss of forest land due to the construction of CETP. No tree felling is involved, as
the site is devoid of vegetation. Birds and other domesticated biodiversity observed near
the project site are common and already adapted to thrive in human - colonized habitats.
The project will not have any major negative ecological impact. There is no forest near the
project site and therefore there will be no effect on the ecology of the area. Project site was
an agricultural land before land acquired by HSIIDC. Compensation has already given to
farmers for their land acquisition.
Impacts –
 The noise will be produced during construction activity.

 Increased employee awareness through providing training.
 The construction activity will be carried out during day time only. The vehicles will
be maintained in good condition to minimize the noise due to traffic.

Impacts –
 Final Disposal of treated effluents, after insufficient treatment in CETP may

create impacts on ecology and surroundings due to its use by farmers.
 Accidental discharge of waste water may create impact on surrounding ecology

if not handled properly.
 CETP will have beneficial effect on the environment due to reduction in pollution
 Green belt/ plantation will be developed around the CETP.
 No biologically sensitive area is present within 10 km radial area
 Acoustic enclosure shall be provided to DG set to reduce the noise intensity There is
no ecologically important area (e.g. National Park, Sanctuary) in the study area so
impact on such areas is not expected.
4.6 SOCIO ECONOMIC ENVIRONMENT –

Impacts –
a. Impact on Population Composition
The impact of the proposed project on population composition will be either nil or
negligible as only few skilled and managerial staff will be recruited from outside and the
rest will be recruited locally.
b. Impact on Employment Generation

The proposed project will provide an employment opportunity which includes both skilled
workers and unskilled workers. During Construction phase the labours and workers will be
hired from nearby villages. During operation phase, the project is expected to provide
direct new employment of about 300 personnel and indirect employment to about
1000 personnel. This will create positive impact of the proposed CETP project.
c. Impact on Health
The proposed effluent plant will certainly be blessings for the people in the neighborhood
and the intensity of various diseases is expected to come down appreciably, when the plant
operates effectively. Hence, the impact of the proposed CETP project will be positive and
needs to be welcomed by all in the study area.
d. Impact on Consumption Pattern

Increased household income will certainly enhance the consumption pattern of few
selected households who would be benefitted by getting employed in the above project
directly or indirectly. This is a positive impact of the proposed project which is directly
related to employment generation caused by the proposed project.
e. Impact on utilities
Utilities include supply of water, electricity, gas and sewage facilities. It is likely that the
residents in the neighborhood will not face any bottleneck in accessing utility services such
as water supply, electricity, gas and sewage facilities due to the upcoming project in the
area.
4.7 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT –

Impacts –
During construction phase excavated earth will be used for backfilling and leveling of
project site. The topsoil will be preserved separately and reused for landscaping. The
construction wastes are largely scraps, aggregates and other construction material rejects.
While no health hazard is expected from such wastes, unplanned disposal can cause safety
concerns.
During operation phase, biodegradable solid wastes such as waste vegetables, foods and no
biodegradable solid wastes viz. metals, papers, cartons, plastics, glass etc. are likely to be
generated. Such wastes may include hazardous wastes also, and unless treated or disposed
adequately can cause health and environmental hazards. Especially with a high ground
water table, it is extremely important to avoid any soil contamination that may ultimately
leach into the groundwater reserves of the area. The biomedical wastes that will be
generated from the project pose various health hazards.
Unless rendered harmless prior to disposal. Most of these wastes will be infectious or
cytotoxic. However, an integrated waste management plan in accordance to all applicable
regulations and guidelines is proposed to ensure against any such incidence.
To ensure against any nuisance caused by improper disposal of wastes, it is proposed to
identify waste collection areas within the site that will be regularly cleared. Recyclable
wastes will be sold off to scrap dealers and recyclers, while inert wastes will be made
available for filling and leveling of low lying areas. Hazardous wastes will be disposed off as
per the provisions of the Hazardous Wastes (Management, Handling and Trans-boundary
Movement) Rules, 2008 and as amended.
Waste oil and batteries will be disposed through sale to authorized recyclers and buy back
arrangements respectively. Inert wastes will be transported to the waste dump site. CFLs
shall be stored in the premises until ‘Lamp Recycling Units’ are set up that will receive and
recycle the bulbs in an environmentally sound manner. Storage shall be in a cemented and
covered area.
All hazardous wastes will be stored and disposed as per the Hazardous Wastes (Management,
Handling and Trans-boundary Movement) Rules, 2008 and Amendments 2009. All movements
of the hazardous waste shall be in accordance to the Manifest system in the said notification.
The wastes shall be disposed at the authorized TSDF site. Care will be taken such that the
collection vehicles are well maintained and equipped with air and noise pollution control
mechanism. During transportation of waste, it will be covered to avoid littering.
Summary of potential impacts and mitigation measures during construction and
operation phase –
The potential impacts during construction and operational stage along with mitigation
measures are presented in Table 5.1 & Table 5.2 respectively.
Table 5.1: Potential Impacts and Mitigation Measures during Construction Phase
Environme Sources of Potential Impacts Mitigation Measures Remarks
ntal Impacts
Component
 Land preparation  Dust emission  Water spraying on haul  No remarkable increase in dust
and construction roads in project site emission and other air pollutants.
activity.  Stacking of  Regular maintenance of  The construction activity will be
Air Quality  Vehicular traffic
construction vehicles. completed in shortest possible
material may block  Vehicles with PUC period.
roads
 HEMM, heavy  Workers  Construction work during  Noise will be below stipulated
machineries and exposed to day time only standard of 75 dB(A) for
Noise truck movement increased noise  Ear plugs for workers occupational area
Quality
near  Regular maintenance of
machineries machineries and trucks
 Wastewater  Excavated  Storm water with  Secured storage and reuse of
produced material sediments from excavated material in
from labour  Public health excavated material construction and land filling
Water
Quality colony concern due  Modular Septic tank
to wastewater for
wastewater treatment
Land preparation  Change in  Project site is open Quantum of excavated O.B. &
Land and construction construction waste will be small.
land use land allotted for CETP
Quality
activity pattern so no change in land

use pattern.
 Overburden &  Reuse of O.B. &
construction construction
waste may enclosures / rooms.
pollute soil.  Reuse of O.B. &
construction waste in
construction and for
land fill during
landscaping.
Ecology Land preparation for Production of noise Construction work during Increase in noise will be very small.
(terrestrial construction of CETP day time only and vehicles
and will be maintained in good
aquatic)
condition
Construction of No adverse impact Direct and indirect Improvement in socioeconomic
Socio- employment
CETP status of local people.
Economic
opportunities
 Construction  Development  Commercial and
activity of economic
require many industries in development
products the area
from other  Low cost sanitation
Infrastructu industries  Insanitary facility and
re &
conditions & safe water will be
Services
public health provided
problems
 First aid and medical
help will be provided
 Personal protective
equipment
will be provided
 Construction  No major  Provide preventive Construction of CETP will not involve
of CETP environmenta measures blasting activity
l hazard for potential fire
Environme hazards with
ntal
requisite fire detection,
Hazards
firefighting
facilities and adequate
water storage
Table 5.2: Potential Impacts and Mitigation Measures during Operation Phase
Environmen Sources of Potential Impacts Mitigation Measures Remarks

tal Impacts
Component
 Small  Small amount  Vehicular movement is Generators will be
amount of of dust reduced due to pipeline used only during
vehicular emission due conveyance of effluent. load shedding period.
movement to vehicular
 Good housekeeping will be
movement
Air Quality maintained.
 Operation of
DG  Negligible  Vehicles will be maintained
generators emission of in
during air pollutants good conditions with PUC;
emergency due to DG sets
only  Roads will be maintained in
 Traces of good condition;
 CETP odour may be
operation produced  Generators (DG) with
Co- proper height of stack as
per guidelines
Generation
and will be used during
Plant emergency only.
 Peripheral green belt will

minimize odour further.
 Waste  Some amount  Noise from generator sets  Increase in noise
treatment of increase in will be within stipulated levels will be within
pumps, fans, noise levels standards due to acoustic limits.
Noise
enclosures/ rooms.
Quality generator
and
 Ear plugs to workers.
vehicles
 Possibility of  Better Quality  Recycle and reuse of  The partially
contaminatio of treated treated effluent treated and untreated
n of Ground industrial industrial effluent and
water effluent due to  Domestic sewage will be sewage will be
Water treatment treated in STP. mandatorily passed
Quality scheme with through CETP.
recovery/reus  CETP will be constructed
e potential with strong foundation and
water proof RCC work to
avoid any seepage.
Land  Production of  No impact due  Chemical sludge after  Record of sludge disposal
Quality

hazardous to proper reduction in quantity by shall be kept as per
chemical management segregation from bio- Hazardous Waste
sludge sludge and by decantation (Management,
will be sent to authorized Handling and
facility. Transboundary) Rules,
2008 & amended thereof.
 Operation of  No impact due  CETP will have beneficial  No biologically
CETP to effect on the environment sensitive area is
Ecology insignificant present within 10
(terrestrial km radial area
emission  Green belt/plantation will
and aquatic)
through air. be developed around the
CETP.
 Operation of  Negligible  Local people will be given Other benefits:
CETP: influx of preference in employment
Construction outside or  Industrial
contract jobs. Development
Phase and people as
Operation workers.
 Improvement in
Phase  Generation of primary & aesthetic and
Socio-
 Beneficial secondary employment to hygienic
Economic
impacts with local people environment
respect to
employment  Public health will
be improved.
and other
socioeconomi
c aspects.
Infrastructu  Operation of  Infrastructura  Commercial and economic  Treated water will
re & CETP l and development will be be circulated for
Services

industrial possible. horticulture &
development agricultural. Basic
will take utilities like supply of
place. water, electricity, gas etc.
will be improved.
 Pressure on  No major
transportatio impact on
n and transportatio
Transportat communicati n&
ion and on communicatio
-- --
Communicat n as all the
ion facilities are
already well
developed in
the area.
 CETP  No historical,
operation archeological
Historical,
Archeologic and
al and architectural -- --
Architectura sites are
l Sites present in the
study area.
implementation of SLF at Industrial Growth Centre, Lassipora, District-Pulwama, J&K by M/s
J& K SIDCO.
CHAPTER-5
ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES
5.1. INTRODUCTION
The present chapter discusses the various other alternatives considered in developing the
project. It also compares the technical, financial and environmental feasibility of the
project, where applicable.
An industrial estate at Lassipora was developed by J&K SIDCO to attract the industrial
entrepreneur in the late seventies. There after there is a consistent demand of industrial
plots. J&K State Industrial Development Corporation (J&K SIDCO) has acquired the
proposed project land for developing the industrial plots with the modern environment
friendly facilities.
SITE IDENTIFICATION
The overall objective of industrial estate planning is to identify sites for IGC and plan
industrial development in compatibility with the surrounding land uses. The various steps
involved in the identification of a suitable site for Industrial Growth Centre’s which
includes:
 Identification of a search area where suitable sites for developing industrial estates
for industries might be found
 Detailing environmental sensitivity of the search area and its surroundings;
 Avoiding areas which are attached with the sensitivity
 Assessing the sitting potential of the search areas by identifying suitable sites for
Industrial Growth Centre’s (so called "candidate sites")
 Identification of types of industries that can be allowed in these industrial estates
after assessing the pollution risks from those industries and the environmental
impact risks by predicting the amount and spatial extent of adverse impacts.
Page 213
J& K SIDCO.
Recommending necessary effluent treatment, waste disposal facilities and other
commonly needed abatement infrastructure used by all industries of the industrial
estate
 Providing appropriate buffer zones around the industrial estates
 Recommending land use controls around the industrial estates for controlling
and minimizing adverse environmental impacts; and
 Identifying the social impacts of developing an industrial estate at an identified site
and recommend methods of mitigation or compensation, if needed.
Site analysis
 Identification of suitable site for industrial estate is based on various considerations.
Approach for assessment of site suitability of identified candidate sites is shown in
Figure 5.1 below.
Page 214
J& K SIDCO.
Identification of Search Area
Area to be avoided (Biological & Sensitive/Incompatible land Uses)
Identification of candidate sites
Physical Infrastructure Environmental Considerations Socio-Economic

based on proposed Industry Consideration
Water Supply
Land Use Sensitivities Skilled Man power
Electricity
Air Pollution Sensitivities Market
Water Pollution
Discharge for ETP Sensitivities
Settlements
Connectivity to Rail,
Social Acceptance
road & air network Noise Pollution
Contribution to
Land Availability Soil Pollution Industrial
Development
Figure 5.1: Site Suitability Approach for Candidate Sites
Page 215
Page 216
J& K SIDCO.
Site Planning and Development
Site planning within the industrial estate demands a holistic approach for its sustainability,
which includes the effective components of spatial planning, infrastructure planning, and
risk based planning and environmental management tools, resource utilization
management and social infrastructure planning, etc. The master site plan for the industrial
estates shall include the following important aspects.
 Long-term vision with focus on international competitiveness
 Focus on integrated infrastructure with emphasis on environmental management
utilities
 Optimal utilization of available land.
 Conservation of important natural features
 Optimal use of natural resources
 Explore synergies of co-existence
 Use of renewable energy sources
 Energy conservation measures
 Traffic management including public transport
 Disaster management
 Inclusion of social infrastructure like housing and allied requirements
 Integration of operation and management aspect
Site Master Planning

The development costs and the construction of an Industrial Growth Centre at Lassipora
are heavily influenced by:-
 Size of the site
 Shape of the site
 Its load-bearing capacity
Site Specifications
The ideal site for an industrial estate for light and medium industry should have:
 Good access by main road to the city, port, and airport
 An adequate water supply
Page 216
J& K SIDCO.
 Reliable electricity supply and telecommunications facilities
 Adequate storm water drainage network
5.2 SELECTION OF SITES FOR DETAILED INVESTIGATION

The algorithmic procedure to be followed for the selection of sites for industrial estates is
as described below:
Step I - Mapping of Constraints
With increasing population the city boundaries are also increasing. The first step for site
selection is mapping of constraints. Constraint mapping eliminates environmentally
unsuitable sites and narrows down the number of sites for further consideration. Certain
features termed as “exclusionary factors” such as restricted areas for play ground, gardens
etc., are identified using map of appropriate scale. These factors will eliminate unsuitable
sites from further analysis.
The factors to be considered while selections are as below:-
1. Transport consideration
 The site should be as near as possible from a suitable main road with
transport facilities.
2. Natural conditions
 Extreme morphology (steep or over steep, liable to land slips)
3. Land use pattern

 Incompatible future land use designations on or adjacent to the site,
particularly hard (built) development or mineral extraction should be
avoided.
 Should not be within a military exclusion zone.
Page 217
J& K SIDCO.
4. Safety of Selected Site

 Ecologically and otherwise sensitive areas: Preferably 5 km; depending on the geo-
climatic conditions the requisite distance may be decided appropriately by the
agency.
 Coastal areas: Preferably ½ km away from the high tide line (HTL).
 Site should not be fallen in critically polluted area. Critically polluted areas are
identified by MoEF & CC from time-to-time.
Step II- Identification of Comparable Potential Sites

As the project site is falls under the notified industrial area so there was no need to study
the potential sites.
Step III- Preliminary Survey (Walk over survey)

The preliminary survey may sometimes require confirmation by other authorities. The
objective of the walkover surveys is to identify sufficient constraints to reduce the number
of possible sites. This was done by surveying the area and collecting data regarding:
 Existing zones of development
 Areas of mineral deposition
 Freshwater and wetland
 Natural vegetation
 Exposed geology
The data required from preliminary survey includes:-

 Is the site presently well drained?
 Are there established watercourses within or adjacent to the site
 Is there evidence of ephemeral streams, springs or sinkholes?
 From the knowledge of geology of the area does the morphology of the site suggest
significant or minimum depths of soft material?
 Is there any evidence of geological features on or near the site?
Page 218
J& K SIDCO.
 Are there any features, which will significantly limit the useful area of the site for
land filling?
 Does the nearby well have high water table?
 Where are the nearest habitat dwelling?
Step IV- Site Investigation on Preferred Sites

Fourth step is site investigation, includes detail survey of hydrogeology, water, climatology,
soil etc, of the sites which are scrutinized from step III. Subsurface exploration and a
topographic survey should be carried out at the preferred site. These site investigations
will be critical to the success of the site selection.
From the results of the site investigation program, the estimates of cost and capacity of the
preferred site(s) may be firmed up and clearly preferred site identified.
General Site Selection Factors:

 Land acquired shall be sufficiently large to provide space for appropriate green
cover including green belt, around the battery limit of that place.
 The Growth centre facilities are to be created over 6193 Kanals of land out of which
1812 of land is to be acquired from private parties at Lassipora and remaining 4381
Kanals being government land already under possession of J&K SIDCO over which
some development work has already been commenced.
 Layout of the industry that may come up in the area must conform to the landscape
of that area, without affecting the scenic features of that place.
 The site has source for fresh water requirement for the project
 The site has source for power requirement for the project
 The site is well connected with (NH-1A) which make site easily accessible.
 Labour during construction phase and workers during operational phase will be
easily available around the area.
 Source of fresh water supply will be tube well.
Page 219
J& K SIDCO.
5.3 BUILDING MATERIALS
The choice of building materials plays an important role in terms of energy efficiency of the
building. The manufacture of building materials should also be assessed to ensure the use
of environment friendly and recycled/ recyclable construction materials.
5.3.1 Wall
Conventionally, clay bricks are cemented in the construction of walls. The strength of these
construction materials cannot be compromised which will otherwise pose a threat to the
life and property of the occupants. However, presently, materials with similar properties
are easily available that are made of waste products, thereby reducing the waste burden
and conserving natural resources. Thus, the project proposes the use of the following
construction material for walls:-
 Fal-G products – are manufactured by use of two waste products being fly ash,
calcined Gypsum (a byproduct of phosphogypsum or natural gypsum) along with
lime.
 Perforated bricks
 Saw dust based doors and window frames
 Ferro cement shutters, PVC doors and windows, Rice husk boards, Natural fibre
reinforced
 Polymer composite door panels.
5.3.2 Roof
The conventional material used for roofing is RCC, as it is suitable for longer spans. The
constituents of RCC, i.e. cement, sand, aggregate and steel are energy intensive materials
and high embodied energy content.
Alternately, it is proposed to use lightweight synthetic aggregates such as fly ash based
aggregates, which is suitable for manufacture of brick, blocks, and is good substitute for
clinker and natural aggregates. They have high rating to fire resistance and provide better
insulation and thus improved energy efficiency. These are manufactured by the aerated
cellular concrete manufacturing process.
Page 220
J& K SIDCO.
5.3.3 Roads and open spaces
In line with environment friendly design it is proposed to provide:
 Non Permeable paving- Non Permeable (porous) paving will be provided to control
surface water runoff by allowing storm water to infiltrate the soil and return to the
ground water. The traffic areas will however continue to be impermeable.
 Gravel/crusher fines - Loose aggregate materials from masonry wastes will be used
to cover pedestrian surfaces.
 Use of steel in fencing, grills, tree covers, and benches and even in streetlights will
be replaced by bamboo in the parks and green landscaped areas.
5.4 ENERGY CONSERVATION

To achieve conservation of energy, appropriate design of a building is of paramount
importance. Accordingly, it is proposed to incorporate the guidelines of Energy
Conservation Building Code, 2005 for the structures of the Industrial Estate project at
Lassipora.
The concept of passive solar design emphasizes architectural design approaches that
minimize building energy consumption by integrating conventional energy-efficient
devices, such as mechanical and electrical pumps, fans, lighting fixtures, and other
equipment, with passive design elements, such as building siting, an efficient envelope,
appropriate amounts of fenestration, increased day lighting design, and thermal mass. The
basic idea of passive solar design is to allow daylight, heat, and airflow into a building only
when beneficial. The project layout has been finalized after careful siting consideration of
various Industrial Estate components to optimize availability of natural sunlight.
 Glazed windows are located to face the south to receive maximum sunlight in
winter.
 To reduce heat losses during the night these windows are double-glazed and
have insulating curtains.
 Thermal storage wall is placed between the glazing and habitable space to prevent
solar radiation from directly entering the living space.
Page 221
J& K SIDCO.
Further, energy efficient lighting will be achieved through:
 To replace all the old tube light street light fixtures with energy efficient fixtures.
 Expenditure for replacement of CFL based light with T5-28W tube lights & old tube
light street light fixtures with energy efficient fixtures will be recovered with in a
period of 5 years through savings
 By providing solar provision in the following buildings:-
 Industries where hot water is required for processing.
 Nursing homes
 Canteens
 Housing complexes
J&K SIDCO will put condition in the building approval about provision of installation solar
water heater systems.
After all phases become functional, there will be provision of biogas plant, gas generation
will be used for lightening of street lights in the Industrial estate, hence saves energy.
CHAPTER -6
ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAM
6.1 Introduction
The purpose of the monitoring program is to ensure that the specified mitigation measures
defined in the Environment Management Plan (EMP) are compiled and leads to the desired
benefits for the target area and its population. To ensure the effective implementation of
the EMP and gauge the efficiency of the mitigation measures, monitoring shall be
undertaken both during the construction and operation phases of the project. This chapter
describes the outlines of the monitoring program for the different environmental
components during the construction and operation phases for evaluation of the
environmental status of the area due to the project proponent as development of an
Industrial Estate affects environment and monitoring is a tool to assess quality of
environment parameters and suggest to apply mitigation measures to recover environment
which is affected due to project activities.
Monitoring of various environmental parameters will be carried out on a regular basis to
ascertain the following:
• State of pollution within the project site and in its vicinity.
• Generate data for predictive or corrective purpose in respect of pollution.
• Examine the efficiency of pollution control system adopted at the site.
• To assess environmental impacts.
The primary aim of monitoring is to provide information that will aid impact management,
and secondarily, to achieve a better understanding of cause-effect relationships and to
improve EIA prediction and mitigation methods. Both the immediate and long-term
benefits from undertaking monitoring as part of EIA are widely recognized.
Monitoring will be used to:

• Measure the impacts that occur during project construction and operation;

Check their compliance with agreed conditions and standards; facilitate impact
management, e.g. by warning of unanticipated impacts; and determine the accuracy of
impact predictions and the effectiveness of mitigation measures.
Monitoring will be carried out at the site as per the norms of CPCB. Environmental
Monitoring Programme conducted will be for various environmental components as per
conditions stipulated in Environmental Clearance Letter issued by MOEF & CC & Consent to
Operate issued by SPCB. Six monthly compliance reports will be submitted on regular basis,
to MoEF& CC, New Delhi on 1st of June & 1st of December.
6.2 Areas of Concern –

The best way to ensure that the new CETP facility operates in a consistent and
environmentally sound manner is to provide for a rigorous monitoring programme based
on the guidelines of CPCB and MoEF& CC. The objective of this programme is to comply
with inlet effluent norms and standards of treated effluent.
To keep the record of pollution load from each industry, the member industry will monitor
the important physico-chemical parameters in their effluents on daily basis. The records of
data on flow rate and daily quantity of effluent from member industries will also be
maintained by concerned industry on daily basis. The data will be provided to CETP
operator for management of CETP. Treatment efficiency programme for CETP will be
established within the treatment plant.
The physico-chemical monitoring of selected parameters of influent and outgoing effluent
at CETP will be maintained on daily basis. Online continuous flow measurement will also be
taken at the outlet of CETP.
Therefore, from the monitoring point of view, the important parameters are quality and
flow of effluent from member industries and its compliance to major effluent quality
parameters, quality of inlet effluent to CETP and outlet treated effluent from CETP and its
compliance to the stipulated standards, surface water and groundwater quality in the
buffer zone, air quality, noise, etc. Suggested monitoring parameters and programmes are
described in the subsequent sections.
Well-equipped water and wastewater testing laboratory will be established in the project
premises.
6.3 Performance Indicators –

The physical, biological and social components are of particular significance to the project
is as listed below:
• Air quality
• Water quality
• Noise levels
• Solid waste management
• Plantation success / survival rate
Of these, the following are selected as the Performance Indicators (PIs) and shall be
monitored, since these are well known and comparative data series exist:
 Air quality
 Water Quality
 Noise Levels
 Flora
 Soil
To ensure the effective implementation of the mitigation measures and environmental
management during construction and operation phases of project, it is essential that an
effective Environmental Monitoring Plan be designed and followed –
6.3.1. Ambient Air Quality Monitoring –

Ambient air quality parameters recommended for monitoring with regard to
constructional activities are PM, CO, SO2, NO2. Monitoring shall be carried out twice a week
for one month in each season during construction phase in accordance to the National
Ambient Air Quantity Standards 2009. The locations with the pollution parameters to be
monitored are detailed out in the Environmental Monitoring Plan.
6.3.2 Noise Level Monitoring –
The measurements of noise levels will be carried out at all designated locations in
accordance to the Ambient Noise Standards formulated by MoEF as given. Noise level will
be monitored on twenty-four hourly bases. Noise should be recorded at “A” weighted
frequency using a slow time response mode of the measuring instrument. The
measurement location, duration and the noise pollution parameters to be monitored are
detailed in the Environmental Monitoring Plan.
6.3.3 Success of Vegetation –
To ensure the proper maintenance and monitoring of the proposed plantation activities, a
regular survey of the survival rate of the planted trees is being proposed up to a period of 2
years from the start of operation of the project.
Summary of Environmental Monitoring Programme –
The summary of Environmental Monitoring Programme for implementation during project
construction and operation phases is given in Tables-6.1 and 6.2 respectively.
Table 6.1: Summary of Environmental Monitoring Programme for Implementation

during Project Construction Phase
S.No. Aspects Parameters to be Frequency of

monitored monitoring
1. Surface & Ground water Surface water parameters - Half Yearly
quality Color, Odour, Turbidity,
Temperature, pH, Salinity,
Conductivity, TDS, TSS,
Turbidity, D.O., BOD,
Phosphates, Nitrates,
Sulphates, Chlorides,
Fluoride, Total Hardness as
CaCO3, Calcium (as Ca),
Magnesium as (Mg), Total
Alkalinity, Iron;
Ground water parameters-
Drinking water standards
2. Stack monitoring for DG PM, SO2, NO2 Half Yearly
set
3. Ambient air quality at PM10, SO2, NO2 Half Yearly
plant
4. Noise level monitoring Equivalent Noise level Half Yearly
5. Soil Quality pH, Conductivity, Texture, Half Yearly
Bulk Density, organic
matter, N.P.K
6. Green belt development Rate of survival and Once per
growth of various species month
6.4. Cost Estimate-

The cost required for implementation of Environmental Monitoring Programme is
approximately 1.65 lakhs at construction stage & 2.1 lakhs /annum at operational stage.
Table 6.2. - Summary of cost of the Environmental Monitoring Programme for

Implementation during Project Operation Phase
S.No. Aspects Approximate recurring cost per annum
1. 0.80 50,000
2. 0.60 25,000
3. 0.70 18,000
Total Cost 2.1 Lacs
6.5. Environmental Policy

The Executives and Managers of the company have defined the Environmental Policy and
approved by Plant-Incharge. The company ensures that the policy is appropriate to the
company’s nature, scale and environmental impact of its activities for treating the effluent.
The policy mentions about monitoring of the system, continuous improvement, pollution
prevention and ensuring to comply with the relevant Regulations as per J & K State
Pollution Control Board water consent and Hazardous waste consent condition, member
units and surrounding residents, employees and expectations of interested parties.
While deciding for environmental policy the company has considered the following:
The organization’s mission, vision, core values and beliefs
 Requirements of and communication with interested parties
 Continual improvement
 Minimization of pollution
 Training Employees
 Specific local or regional conditions
 Relevant environmental regulations
6.6 FORMATION OF ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT CELL (EMC)

In order to maintain the environmental quality within the standards, regular monitoring of
various environmental components is necessary. J &K SIDCO will have a full fledged
Environmental Management Cell (EMC) reporting directly to Functional Head for
environmental monitoring and control. An environment management cell shall constitute
the staff of CETP operation created to perform the following functions:
 Achieve objectives of the ‘’Environment Protection Policy’’of the management.

 Collect information from regular monitoring and create a database.
 Analyze the data and decide thrust areas.
 Based on the data collected, decide target for each thrust area.
 Carry out “Projects‟ in each thrust area to arrive at practical solutions
to Environmental problems.
 Discuss the reports of study on environment and disseminate the information.
 Work out „Action plan‟ for implementation of the recommendations made in the
reports.
 Prepare Management Information System (MIS) reports and budget
for Environment management program.
PLANT INCHARGE
MAINTAINENCE LAB INCHARGE

SUPERVISOR
 TECHNICAL
 ELECTRICIAN ASSISTANT
 MECHANICAL MAN (Chemist)
 COMPUTER  FIELD STAFF
OPERATOR  CASUAL LABORS
 CASUAL LABORS
(as required)
 SHIFT FITTERS
AIR SOIL
WATER NOISE
Fig 6.1 :- Organizational Chart of CETP Indicating Environmental Management Cell

CHAPTER -7
ADDITIONAL STUDIES
7.1 Public Consultation – The project area falls under notified industrial zone of J&K
SIDCO. There is no requirement of Public Hearing.
7.2 Activities at CETP – Activities to be performed :
Activities to be carried out in CETP for treatment of effluent includes the following -
 Operation of treatment plant
 Handling of treatment chemicals
 ETP sludge handling
 Control of flow and processing of wastewater
 Monitoring of control panel
 Adjustments of valves and gates manually or automatically
 Observation of variations in operating conditions
 Starting and stopping of pumps and other equipment
 Maintenance work of CETP units
 To carry out sampling and testing of effluent samples.
7.3 Instruments & Equipment handling –

The workforce of Treatment plant is anticipated to handle following instruments
/equipment:
• Laboratory equipment.
• Measuring and metering devices.
• Mechanized lifting and disposal equipment.
• Portable mechanical working tools.
• Pumps and blowers.

7.4 Types of hazards in CETP –
Risk is a probability that damage to life, health and / or the environment. Risk will
occur as a result of the hazard. Hazard is an inherent property of a substance,
agent, and source of energy or situation having potential of causing undesirable
consequences.
The following two methods of hazard identification have been employed in the
study:
 Identification of major hazards based on Manufacture, Storage, and Import
of Hazardous Chemicals Rules, 1989 Government of India, as amended till
date.
 Primary Hazard Analysis.
The following are the various hazards considered during different phases of the
project i.e. construction and operation phase.
A) Natural Hazards :
Several natural hazards like flooding, earthquake, lightening, etc. may be possible
and may cause danger to surrounding environment.
B) Activity Hazards:
The following activity hazards along with proposed safeguard measures were
studied for construction and operation phase of the project.
(I) Chemical Hazards:
As CETP, there is no such chemical used except alum, poly-electrolyte, activated

carbon, and the quantity required is very less, so there are no hazards associated
with handling of chemicals. However, for further reduction in the chemical hazards,
following measures should be as follows -
Safety Measures for Chemical Hazards:
• Development of safe working procedures.
• Reduction of number of workers exposed to hazards & duration and frequency
of exposure.

• Use of personal protective equipment.

• Regular environmental and medical monitoring.
(II )Accident Hazards:
Different accident hazards associated with CETP construction and operation
activities are as follows:
• Fire hazards,
• Electrical hazards,
• Slips, Trips, and Falls at work, and Biological hazards.
(III )Fire Hazards - Accidental fires due to electrical short circuit represent minor hazards.
Special precautions must be taken for electrical fitting and appliances uses. Sources of
ignition for fire hazards are direct flames, Heat radiation, and Electric spark.
Safety Measures for Fire Hazards:

 Automatic fire detection system and control system should be provided.
 Emergency back-up power like D.G. Sets should be provided for the automatic
systems.
 Matches, cigarettes, etc. should be prohibited.
 Soldering, welding or cutting torches should be used after taking hot work permit
from the consent authority.
 Being a CETP project, in case of fire treated water reservoir will be use for
emergency operation.
(IV ) Electrical Hazards:

Poor electrical installations and faulty electrical appliances can lead to fires which may also
cause death or injury to workers. Hazards involved with electrical network are:
 Contact with live parts causing shock and burns

 Faults which could cause fires
Safety Measures for Electrical Hazards:
 Ensure safety of electrical installation and its maintenance.
 Provision of safe and suitable equipment.
 Provision of safety device.
 Carry out preventive maintenance.
Slips, Trips, & Falls at Work:

Slips and trips are the most common cause of fatal injuries as well as non-fatal major
injuries. The hazards related to slip and trips at work can be reduced through good
housekeeping as well as health and safety arrangements.
Safety Measures for Slips, Trips, & Falls at Work:

The risk associated with slip and trip hazards can be reduced by avoid spillages in
workplace, especially on uneven floors, and trailing cables, and by maintaining good
housekeeping. However, for further reduction in the slips and trips, following measures
should be follows -
• Safety railing / grills, and safety stairs should be provided.
• Safety operating procedure should be followed for tank cleaning, pipeline maintenance
work at depth or height, chemical handling, and doing regular maintenance work.
(V)Biological Hazards:
The workers working in the CETP are prone to following biological hazards:
• Diseases caused by infectious agents present in raw effluent.
• Diseases caused by insects or rodents proliferating in the sludge drying beds.
Safety Measures for Biological Hazards (infection & illness):

 Employees shall understand the risks through proper instruction, training and
supervision, there will be no any direct contact with chemicals.
 Provisions and use of suitable personal protective measures.
 Provision of adequate welfare and sanitation facilities as well as first-aid measures
considering the heavy contamination.
 Provision of separate eating facilities to avoid food poisoning.
 Effective arrangement for monitoring health of staff.
7.5 Fire Fighting System
According to BOCW (Building & other construction workers) ACT, NBC-2005,relevant BIS
standard like BIS-14489 and other related sets out the law on Construction site general fire
safety.
The Statutory requires that a ‘responsible person’ must carry out, and keep up to date, a
risk assessment and implement appropriate measures to minimize the risk to life and
property from fire. The responsible person will usually be the main or principal contractor
in control of the site.
• You should identify sources of fuel and ignition and establish general fire precautions
including, means of escape, warning and fighting fire, based on your fire risk assessment.
• In occupied buildings such as offices, make sure the work does not interfere with existing
escape routes from the building, or any fire separation, alarms, dry risers, or sprinkler
systems.
Key issues are:
 Risk assessment
 Means of escape
 Means of giving warning
 Means of fighting fire
 Construction of timber frame will require significant additional measures
7.6 Risk and Hazard Assessment

In most cases, conducting a risk assessment will be a relatively straightforward and simple
task that may be carried out by the responsible person, or a person they nominate, such as
a consultant.
There are five steps in carrying out a fire risk assessment:
1. Identify hazards: consider how a fire could start and what could burn;
2. People at risk: employees, contractors, visitors and anyone who is vulnerable
e.g. disabled;
3. Evaluation and action: consider the hazards and people identified in 1 and 2 and act
to remove and reduce risk to protect people and premises;
4. Record, plan and train: keep a record of the risks and action taken. Make a clear plan
for fire safety and ensure that people understand what they need to do in the event of a
fire; and
5. Review: your assessment regularly and check it takes account of any changes on site.
Means of escape
Key aspects to providing safe means of escape on construction sites include:
 Routes: your risk assessment should determine the escape routes required, which
must be kept available and unobstructed;
 Alternatives: well-separated alternative ways to ground level should be
provided where possible;
 Protection: routes can be protected by installing permanent fire separation and fire
doors as soon as possible;
Assembly Point: Make sure escape routes give access to a safe place where people can
assemble and be accounted for. On a small site the pavement outside may be adequate; and
Signs: will be needed if people are not familiar with the escape routes. Lighting should be
provided for enclosed escape routes and emergency lighting may be required.
Means of giving warning
Set up a system to alert people on site. This may be temporary or permanent mains
operated fire alarm (tested regularly), a klaxon, an air horn or a whistle, depending on the
size and complexity of the site.
The warning needs to be distinctive, audible above other noise and recognizable by
everyone.
Means of fighting fire
Fire extinguishers should be located at identified fire points around the site. The
extinguishers should be appropriate to the nature of the potential fire:
• Wood, paper and cloth – water extinguisher;
• Flammable liquids – dry powder or foam extinguisher;
• Electrical – carbon dioxide (C02) extinguisher.
Nominated people should be trained in how to use extinguishers.
Process fire risks
The Regulatory Reform (Fire Safety) and National Building Code sets out the law on
construction site general fire safety, including means of escape.
The CDM Regulations 2015 also impose duties including the requirement to prevent risk
from fire. The fire risk from site activities must be assessed and precautions taken to
control:
• Combustible material – the quantity of combustible materials on site should be kept to
the minimum and all such materials safely stored and used.
• Ignition sources – action is needed to eliminate, reduce and control ignition sources on
site.
• Construction of timber frame buildings will require significant additional measures to
those
outlined here. You should refer to the specific guidance listed in Resources, below.
 A) Combustible material
Many solids, liquids and gases can catch fire and burn. It only takes a source of ignition,
which may be a small flame or an electrical spark, together with air. Preventive actions that
can be taken include:
 Quantity: fire risk can be reduced by controlling the amount of combustible
material in the work area until it is needed;
 Flammability: it may be possible to specify materials that are less combustible.
Remember that when worked on, materials may become more easily ignited e.g.
solids turned to dust or crumb;
 Storage: combustible materials should ideally be stored outside buildings under
construction, especially volatile materials e.g. LPG. Internal storage must be planned
and located where it will not put workers at risk;
 Rubbish: good housekeeping and site tidiness are important to prevent fire and
to ensure that emergency routes do not become obstructed;
 Volatile flammable materials: extra precautions are needed for flammable liquids,
gases and oxygen cylinders especially when internally stored;
Coverings and sheeting: protective coverings and scaffold sheeting may add to fire risk.
 This can be reduced by use of flame retardant materials;
Tanks and services: demolition projects can involve an increased risk of fire and
explosion.
Dismantling of tank structures may cause ignition of flammable residues or disruption
and ignition of buried gas services.
 Ignition sources
 It is important that you take action to control ignition sources including:
 Hot work: all hot work generating heat, sparks or flame can cause a fire.
Precautions include:
 Clearing the area of combustible materials;
 Suitable fire extinguishers; and maintaining a careful watch throughout the work.
 A permit to work (PTW) system can help manage the risk on larger projects.
 Plant and equipment: select electrical and engine driven plant of suitable capacity to
prevent overheating. Fasten lamps to a solid backing and, if mounted on tripods, make
sure the tripod is stable. Electrical equipment in flammable atmospheres must be
suitable for the nature and extent of the flammable atmosphere;
 Smoking: bring the rules on smoking to the attention of all workers and visitors
to the site and enforce them;
 Electrical installations: should be of sufficient capacity for the intended use and
designed, installed, inspected and maintained by competent people;
A) Event Classification and Modes of Failure

Component failures are the initiating events for the failure scenarios, which can escalate to
consequences like fires, explosions and equipment damage. Eventual failures could be in
the form of small gasket leaks in a flange joint or guillotine failure of a pipeline or even
rupture /catastrophic failure of equipment. Major failure modes identified in this project
are:
 Pipeline - small/large leaks;
 Storage tank - small/large leaks
B) Power Failure / Load Shedding

Operational difficulties may be experienced at CETP plant when there will be power failure.
Since, there is a provision made for DG sets for running plant during power failure, there
will not be significant effect on the treatment efficiency of the CETP.
Standby generator of total capacity of 60 KVA will be provided during power failure or load
shedding period, which would reduce the chances of inadequate treatment of the effluent.
Training programme for plant operation and maintenance activities have been included as
part of the project’s technical assistance programme.
7.7 Health & Safety Measures

During the operation of CETP and during handling chemicals, a practice of preventive and
protective maintenance will be adopted to take care of employee’s health. The various
safety equipments like breathing apparatus, gum boots, goggles and helmet will be
provided to the workers/operators. Besides, all the first aid, firefighting devices will also be
inspected, tested and maintained all the time in ready to use condition.
Health of all the employees in plant area will be regularly monitored by the physician. If
any abnormality is found, necessary treatment will be given from time to time. Necessary
history cards, records will be maintained which will be up‐dated from time to time. Some of
the safety measures proposed to be carried out to ensure prevention of occupational
hazards is delineated below.
 Safety equipments and fittings for handling of chemicals
 Housekeeping of the plant as per prescribed norms. Floors, platforms, staircases,
passages will be kept free of any obstruction.
 All operations will be explained to the workers. They will be periodically trained on
the processes.
 Should impart safety training to the employees engaged.
 Only authorized persons will be allowed inside the plant.
 All instruments and safety devices will be checked and calibrated during installation
and at frequent intervals.
 All electrical equipments will be installed as per prescribed standards.
 All the equipments of the plant will be periodically tested as per standard and
results will be documented. All equipments will undergo preventive maintenance
schedule.
 Number of fire extinguishers will be installed at different locations within premises.
 Adequate ventilation arrangement will be provided for safe and better working in
the plant as per the standard.
 Sufficient access for firefighting will be provided in the plant.
 Protection against lightning will be taken care in the plant
7.8 Disaster Management Plan

An accident is an unplanned event which has a probability of causing personal injury or
property damage or both. It may result in physical harm (injury of disease) to personnel
and also damage to property, loss to the company, a near miss or combination of these
effects.
Major accident
 It will be a sudden, unexpected, unplanned event, resulting from uncontrolled
developments during an industrial activity, which causes, or has the potential to cause;
 Serious adverse effect immediately or delayed (death, injuries, poisoning or hospitalization)
to number of people inside the installation and/or to persons outside the establishments or,
 Significant damage to crops, plant or animals, or significant contamination of land, water or
air or, An emergency intervention outside the establishment (ex. Evacuation of local
population, stopping of local traffic) or,
 Significant changes in the process operating conditions, such as stoppage or suspension or
normal work in the concerned plan for a significant period of time, or
 Any combination of above effects.
a) Emergency
 It could be defined as any situation which presents a threat of safety of persons or/and
property. It may require outside help also. Emergency due to operating conditions
(small fire, spill, failure of power, water, air etc.) and which can be locally handled by
plant personnel alone (without outside help) will be considered as emergency.
Objectives of the On Site Emergency Plan
1. To define & assess emergencies, including risk & environment impact assessment.
2. To control & contain incidents.
3. To safeguard employees, visitors & other people in the vicinity.
4. To minimize damage to property &/or the environment.
5. To inform employees, the general public and the authorities about the hazards/ risk
assessed safeguard provided residual risk if any and the role to be played by them in
the vent of emergency.
6. To be ready for the mutual aid if need rises to help the neighboring unit. Normal
jurisdiction of an OEP(on-site emergency plan) will the own premises only, but looking to
the time factor in the arriving the external help of off-side plan agency, the jurisdiction
must be extended outside to the extent possible in case of emergency occurring outside.
7. To inform authorities and mutual aid centers to come for help.

8. To affect rescue and treatment of causalities to count injured.
9. To identify and list any dead.
10. To inform and help relatives.
11. To secure the safe rehabilitation of affected area and to restore normalcy.
12. To provide authoritative information to the news media.
13. To preserve records, equipments, etc., and to organize investigation into the cause of
the emergency and preventive measure to stop its recurrence.
14. To ensure safely of the works before personnel re-enter and resume work.
15. To work out a plan with all provisions to handle emergencies and to provide
for emergency preparedness and the periodical rehearsal of the plan.
In order to meet the above objectives, detailed procedure for handling On Site Emergency
has been prepared, which will intended to cover all foreseeable eventualities even those
leading to the evacuation of the site.
Major Emergency
Major Emergency could be defined as any situation which may affect several departments
within and/ or may cause serious injuries, loss of life, extensive damage to property of serious
disruption outside the work. It will require the use of outside resources to handle it effectively.
Usually the result of a malfunction of the normal operating procedure, it may also be
participated by the intervention of an outside agency, such as severs electrical storm, flooding,
crashed aircraft or deliberate acts of arson or sabotage.
b) Disaster
It will a catastrophic situation in which the day to day patterns of life are, in many instances,
suddenly disrupted and people are plugged into helplessness, suffering and as a result need
protection, clothing, shelter, medical & social care and other necessities of life such as:
Disaster resulting from natural phenomena like earthquakes, volcanic eruptions, storm, surges,
cyclones, tropical storms, floods, landsides, forest fires and massive infect infestation. Also in

this group, violent drought which will cause a creeping disaster leading to famine disease and
death must be included. Second group includes disastrous events occasioned by man or by
man’s impact upon the environment, such as armed conflict, industrial accidents, fires,
explosions and escape of toxic gases or chemical substances, rivers, pollution, mining / deep
excavations or other structural collapse, air, sea, rail and road transport accident, aircraft
crashes, collisions of carrying inflammable liquids, oil spills at sea and dam failures.
c) Risk –
The likelihood of an undesired event (i.e. accident, injury or death) occurring within a
specified period or under specified circumstances. It may be either a frequency or a
probability depending on the circumstances.
d) Hazard –
Hazard is a physical situation which may cause human injury, damage to property or the
environmental or combination of these criteria.
Emergency Organization
No plan will succeed without effective emergency organization. Key personnel to combat
emergency should be nominated with specific responsibilities according to the set procedures
and making the best use of the resources available with different department and to avoid
confusion. Respective department’s key personnel are important part to combat emergency as
part of organization. Such key personnel include Incident controller, Site main controller,
Communication officer, messenger, Essential workers etc. Assembly point for non essential
workmen, occupational health center, emergency control room, firefighting arrangement, first
aid arrangement and other arrangement and persons to manage them and also important part
of emergency organization. Other key personnel will be required to provide advice to and
implement the decisions made by the Site Main Controller (SMC) in the light of information
received on the developing situation at the emergency. Such key personnel (i.e. Fire fighters,
First-Aider, Emergency rescue, Communication officer, messenger, security people, P&A officer
etc.) will included from various department. All key personnel will responded on instruction
given by Site Main Controller / Incident Controller.
Their roles and responsibilities will mention below -
 Responsibility of Incident Controller
 Rush to accident site, ask field person to close the required valves.
 Inform control room from field to take required action.
 Take charge at the scene of incident and assess the scale of emergency.
 Decide for continuing the operation of the plant.
 Decide the need of external help.
 Ensure that outside emergency services have been called in.
 Ensure that SMC and Key personnel have been called in.
 Direct firefighting operations to internal as well as external agencies.
7.8.1 Hazard during Construction & Operation
Increased urban development and requirements for strict control of the quality of effluents
discharged into streams, rivers, estuaries and coastal water has led to the need to set up
individual waste water/effluent treatment plant and common effluent treatment plants.
The wastewater treatment ranks of industrial occupations where on-the-job injuries are
frequent. The wastewater treatment plant operators are exposed to a variety of hazardous
chemical agents contained within the effluent and the reagents used in the water processing or
generated during the wastewater treatment which may cause poisoning and a number of
ailments in the operators.
The operators are also exposed to hazards related to work in confined spaces, which include
electric shocks, explosions, entanglement in moving machinery, etc
Against natural calamities like floods, earthquakes, lightening, possible accidental hazards Fire
& explosion hazards Electricity Slips, trips and falls at work , chemical hazards, biological
hazards and ergonomic, psychological and organization factors and the preventive measures
required in common effluent treatment plants.
7.8.1.1 Risk and Hazard during Construction:

Excavation: Any person-made cut, cavity, trench depression in an earth surface, formed by
earth Trench:
A narrow excavation with its depth greater than width, but the width at the bottom is not
greater than top.
Competent Person: One who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in
the surrounding working conditions that are unsanitary, hazardous and dangerous Hazards
 Excavation cave-ins
 Underground and overhead utilities
 Materials falling into excavations
 Hazardous atmosphere of work.
 Vehicle movement and equipment operation
 Water accumulation.
 No protective system
 Ladder is not angled working height (vertical)
 Poor housekeeping
 The excavated soil is close to the edge and not retained to prevent from falling into the
trench/excavated area.
 Overnight rain can make excavated area unsafe.
Hazards of Mechanized Excavators
 Struck by vehicle
 Blind spot
 Toppling of the equipment
 Contact with power transmission
Basic Safety Requirements
 Sloping or benching for excavations deeper shall be designed.

 Means of access/egress (ladder) required if it is 4 feet deep or more.
 Spoil dirt must remain at least 1 meter from of the trench/excavation.
 Trench/ Excavations are to be identified and barricaded.
 Personnel are not permitted to work in trench excavations where water is accumulating.
 Fall Protection is required for walkways over deeper than 2 feet.
 Identification, isolation, protection of underground utilities and structures nearby to be
taken care.
7.8.1.2 Electrical safety in construction
The law says you must take precautions against the risk of death or injury from electricity.
Electrical equipment must be safe, and properly maintained. Only in exceptional circumstances
should work be carried out on live systems, and then only by a competent authorized person.
Electrical systems in buildings - Refurbishment work in buildings presents the greatest risk and
must be planned, managed and monitored to ensure that workers are not exposed to risk from
electricity.
Overhead power lines - Any work near electric overhead power lines must be carefully planned
and carried out to avoid danger from accidental contact or close proximity to the lines.
Underground cables - Damage to underground electrical cables can cause fatal or severe injury
you must take precautions to avoid danger. These precautions include a safe system of work
based on planning, use of plans, cable locating devices and safe digging practices.
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
Always wear the proper gloves when working with acids. Neoprene and rubber gloves are
effective against most acids and bases. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) is also effective for most acids.
A rubber coated apron and goggles should also be worn. If splashing is likely to occur, wear a
face shield over the goggles. Always use corrosives in a chemical fume hood.
Checklist for PPE
• All workers should wear PPE to protect head, eye, hand and feet.
• Helmet, hand gloves, safety shoe and goggles Safety belt/safety harness for working
at height.
• First aid kit with medicine to be available at site.
7.9 Conclusion
Risk assessment should be carried out in order to identify the needs in handling these hazards.
Risk assessment shall include: Identifying the possible hazards The Receptors who would be
harmed because of the hazards Adequacy of the existing precautionary measures Reviewing
and revising the assessment from time to time Identifying the greater risk of damage based on
Recognize, Evaluate and Control. In evaluation we have to adopt both Qualitative and
Quantitative Analysis. After completion of risk assessment, following findings can be used for
reducing the risks.
Safe installation of electrical appliances as per standards.
• Use of safe and suitable equipments for the working environment
• Provision for safety devices for detecting faults
• Preventive maintenance by testing the equipments and visual inspection
• Safe working conditions considering underground power cables overhead power lines
These are the most common causes of non-fatal injuries at work but may cost workers heavily.
Slip and trip hazards can be reduced through good health and safety arrangements of the
workers/employers.
There should be adequate information on appropriate use of the safety equipments provided.
A good management system for health and safety shall include: planning for minimizing or
removing risks by identifying the risk areas organization setup with responsibilities to ensure
safe working conditions control on working practices and processes by record keeping and
maintenance to ensure good health and safety monitoring and reviewing the reports regularly
based on experience and improving the existing conditions. good working practices by choosing
suitable floor surfaces, lighting levels, provision for footwear, removing obstructions, warn
signs, etc.
Chemical hazards Sources of chemical hazards can be exposure to chemicals and toxic effects of
chemicals. Exposure to chemicals .The heaviest exposure to some chemicals often occurs during
industrial activities. The four main exposure routes where chemicals enter the body are
through inhalation (breathing), absorption (skin or eye), ingestion (swallowing, eating) and
Accidental.
Most of the chemicals in the workplace have the potential to be dispersed into the air as
dust, droplets or as gas or vapor or inhalation. The most important routes of exposure in the
workplace leading to systemic effects are inhalation and skin absorption. Also, ingestion is a
potential source through contaminated food or drink in the workplace. Toxic effects of
chemicals. The toxicity in chemicals may poison the body of the person exposed. The toxic
chemical exposure may lead to acute, chronic, reversible, irreversible, local, systematic and
synergism effect. The toxicity of chemicals can be classified as corrosive, irritant, sensitizer,
asphyxiant, carcinogen, mutagen, teratogen and fetotoxicant. To avoid these toxic risk
assessment should be carried out which involves identification of hazard based on chemicals of
concern, adverse effects, target populations, risk characterization, assessing, exposure and
estimating the risk.
Develop material safety data sheets (MSDS) for all the chemicals used in the workplace Ensure
whether chemical products clearly indicate their harmful effects and provide guidance on how
to use the products as safely as possible Instruct workers on labels and MSDS Workers should
have the right to refuse to work with chemicals which does not have safety information about
the chemical To prevent, control or eliminate the risk – all the workers are required to
implement effective safety procedures for protection against chemical hazards agreed jointly by
employer and workers through Regular inspections with standard checklists for particular
chemicals and chemical processes.
Substitution
The most effective way is to remove the chemical entirely and replace it with less hazardous
chemical, wherever possible. Similarly, dangerous processes can also be substituted to avoid
the production of toxic intermediates.
Engineering controls
In case, the chemical hazard cannot be removed from the workplace by substitution then the
best solution is to physically enclose the hazard to prevent it from coming into contact with
either workers or the environment. Dilute or local exhaust ventilation systems can be used to
remove contaminated air from the workplace.
Biological hazards: Exposure to wastewater may result in number of illnesses when entered
into the body. Some of these illnesses are: Gastroenteritis – Cramping stomach pain, diarrhea
and vomiting.
As the micro-organisms are inherent in wastewater they cannot be removed or eliminated.
However, exposure to wastewater can be minimized to avoid these biological hazards. The
following measures can be taken to reduce risk of infection and illness: Awareness on risks
through instructions, training and supervision use of personal protective equipment such as
water proof gloves, footwear, eye and respiratory protection, face visors, etc. workers should be
of 20 to 50 years age group and must not have asthma and tuberculosis provide the workers
with adequate welfare facilities such as clean water, soaps, disposable paper towels, showers,
etc. Inspection and maintenance of safety equipments provision for adequate first aid facilities
effective arrangements for monitoring health and safety. Ergonomic and psychological hazards:
These hazards can be raised due to stress during work. Some of the problems which may lead to
stress are: Boring job repetitive job too little or too much work to do too little time too little or
too much training for the job selecting right person to fit into the task poor relationship with
others bullying, racial or sexual harassment inflexible work schedules poor physical working
conditions lack of communication and consultation lack of support for individuals to develop
their skills lack of control over work activities negative work culture. These hazards can be
minimized by following measures: clarity in defined objectives and responsibilities of an
individual linked to business objectives selection of appropriate person for the assigned tasks
prioritizing the jobs, training the individuals based on interpersonal skills and increasing the
scope of work for the trained increase the variety of tasks rearrange people between the jobs in
order not to get bored with the single task working in group to improve the performance
setting up of an effective system to prevent and stop harassments working in shifts to ensure
flexible working hours provision for regular health checkups provision for adequate control
measures opportunity to contribute individual ideas in planning and organizing the jobs
introducing clear business objectives, good communications and employee involvement
particularly during period of change any individual should be honest and respect others
support the individuals to develop their skills.
Hazardous air pollution Solvents in huge quantities are used in pharmaceutical, chemical, dyes
& dye intermediate units. The recovery and reuse of these solvents in such units is very poor
because of the indigenous technology, equipment adds to pollution load in CETP. Especially in
connection with high levels of fine particulates, noxious gases like methane, CO 2, SO2 and NOx
can lead to respiratory diseases. The duration of exposure is decisive. Injurious heavy metals
(e.g., lead, mercury and cadmium) can enter the food chain and, hence, the human organism by
way of drinking water and vegetable and animal products.
Climatic changes such as warming and acidification of surface waters, forest depletion, etc., can
occur due to acid rain and/or the greenhouse effect of methane and CO 2 and other trace gases
can have long-term detrimental effects on human health. Similarly important are the effects of
climatic changes on agriculture and forestry (and thus on people’s standard of living), e.g.,
large-scale shifts of cultivation to other regions and/or deterioration of crop yields due to
climate change impacts.
In view of the above we have to have to avoid/mitigate the Risk and hazard both during
construction phase and operational phase of common Effluent treatment plant we have to
adopt 3E system which is basically Engineering Control- for sound engineering
Education and training- To improve awareness Enforcement- to follow statute and also
maintain discipline.
CHAPTER -8
PROJECT BENEFITS
8.1 Benefit of CETP –
The rapid growth of industries over the last two decades in IGC, Lassipora has been
beneficial for economic prosperity. This needs an imperative action on the conservation of
natural resources to protect the flora and fauna.
There was development in terms of establishment of new industries especially small scale
industries without providing any infrastructure like CETP.
J&K SIDCO (Jammu & Kashmir State Industrial Development Corporation Ltd.) proposes to
upgrade and expand the existing Common Effluent Treatment Plant (CETP) of 600 KLD
capacity to 1100 KLD capacity at Village- Lassipora, District- Pulwama, that falls in the IGC,
Lassipora.
PROJECT BENEFITS
 During construction phase, skilled and unskilled manpower will be needed. This will
temporarily increase the employment opportunity. Secondary jobs are also bound to
be generated to provide day-to-day needs and services to the work force. This will
also temporarily increase the demand for essential daily utilities in the local market.
 The proposed project may provide ample trade opportunities particularly related to
supply of effluent treatment chemicals, supply of construction materials etc.
 There will be increase in the local trade indirectly benefiting the local people.
 The successful operation of CETP will also reduce the need of regular monitoring of
all the individual member unit by statutory authority.
 The owner(s) of the member unit will be able to concentrate more on the quality
production as they will be no longer require to spend time on wastewater
management.
 Qualified and experienced person in the field of Environment Pollution Control will
be appointed as a Plant in-charge for overall responsibility for the management of all

the issues related to Environment, Health, and Safety within the plant, who will
directly report to the CETP management, for issues related to the Environment
Management System.
The advantage of CETP is mostly sought due to following benefits:

 Latest technology available
 Water reclamation and recycling
 Low treatment cost
 Encouragement to utilize the existing facility if intended
 The immediate effect will be reduction in the discharge of industrial effluents in the
adjoining Basantar river.
 This facility will also treat the domestic sewage produced in surrounding villages, in
proposed STP
 The effluent discharge will comply with the guidelines given by JKSPCB, CPCB and
MoEF&CC and will not be harmful to the ecology and environment.
 Reduction in eutrophication of the nearby water bodies will make them suitable as
the habitat for the fish population, microorganisms, planktons, and other aquatic
food web organisms thus developing a sustainable ecosystem.
 The organic matter and nutrients removed in the form of biological sludge will act
as resource and will be used as manure for the plantation and green belt in the
industrial area and in agricultural fields in the surrounding area.
 Aesthetic appearance and quality of the river will be improved which will be useful
for the local people.
 There is no ecologically sensitive area within a 10 km radial distance of the project
site.
 No wildlife sanctuary or national park is present within the study area.
 A peripheral greenbelt/plantation, garden and lawn will be provided which will
improve the aesthetics of the area.
 As the proposed site is the industrial area away from residential area and all the
required care will be taken to control the pollution levels to minimum as discussed

in the relevant sections of this report, no adverse impacts are anticipated due to
construction of CETP during construction and operation phase.
 Temporary hutment for the construction workers will be provided with basic
amenities like low cost sanitation facilities, first aid, safe drinking water supply and
personal protective equipment’s etc. The workers will be provided the medical
assistance whenever required.
 Adequate mitigation measures will be ensured to reduce odour emissions and
disease vectors from proposed site to eliminate the nuisance.
 Hence the status of sanitation and community will be maintained in good condition
at the project site.
 It is concluded that the present project is essential to reduce the pollution level in
the area from aesthetic point of view as well as from public health point of view.
This will be helpful to maintain the indigenous aquatic and terrestrial ecology. The
expected reduction in pollution levels would help in further level of industrialization
and improvement in the socio-economic status of the local people.
8.2 Employment Potential –

During construction phase, skilled and unskilled manpower will be needed. This will
temporarily increase the employment opportunity. Secondary jobs are also bound
to be generated to provide day-to-day needs and services to the work force. This
will also temporarily increase the demand for essential daily utilities in the local
market.
The manpower requirement for the proposed plant is expected to generate some
permanent jobs and secondary jobs for the operation and maintenance of plant. This
will increase direct/indirect employment opportunities and ancillary business
development to some extent for the local population. This phase is expected to
create a beneficial marginal impact on the local socio-economic environment.
Approximately 50 workers each will get employment during constructive &
operative phase of the project. There will be indirect employment generation for
transportation sector as well as ancillary industries.
8.3 Economic Benefits
The proposed project may provide ample trade opportunities particularly relate d to
supply of effluent treatment chemicals, supply of construction materials etc. There will be
increase in the local trade indirectly benefiting the local people.
The centralized effluent treatment facility with appropriate technology & under expert
supervision of the technical staff, will reduce the treatment cost per unit of the effluent
quantity thus reducing the production cost of the products being manufactured by the
member units creating an opportunity for them to compete in the market.
The owner(s) of the member unit will be able to concentrate more on the quality
production as they will be no longer require to spend time on wastewater management.
The long term implication of these changes will be definitely progressive as this may lead
to probable expansion of the production facilities.
8.4 Environmental cost & benefit analysis
The upcoming project will generate direct and indirect employment opportunities for the
local people. The CETP will create employment including skilled as well as semi-skilled
staff directly or indirectly. The secondary employment in the form of providing services to
the employed manpower will also be developed in the neighboring villages.
The J&K SIDCO will also provide the helping hand in the development of the nearby villages
by arranging regular medical checkup camp for the employees. The project will generate a
fair amount of direct, indirect and induced employment in the study region. The local
economy will receive a boost due to employee spending and services generated by
applicant.
8.5 Corporate Social Responsibility –

Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) refers to responsibility of a company to ensure
positive impact on environment, consumers, employees, communities, stakeholders and all
other members of the public sphere. The CSR activities are increasingly being taken up by
the project proponents not only as fulfilling of mandatory provisions but also for the
formation and/or enhancement of brand image. Besides the above, CSR is seen more as a
responsibility towards society rather than a business promotion activity.
The execution of the project will not disturb the people living in the area as there will be no
blasting and large scale digging. The activities to be undertaken for the local people under
CSR have been identified and 2% of the total cost of the project is proposed to be spent on
community development. It is expected that this will improve the socio-economic status of
the people. The local community in the study area desired that the project proponent
should take-up the following development initiatives for the betterment of the local people.
Various activities proposed to be taken up under CSR:-

(1) Free Medical Check-up Camp” for the benefit of employees and people of surrounding
villages
(2) Provide training and awareness programme to the villagers.
(3) Mass Tree plantation campaign in industrial area and nearby villages.
CHAPTER -9
Cost-Benefit Analysis
9.0 General
As per EIA Notification dated 14th Sept., 2006, the Chapter on the ‘Environmental Cost
Benefit Analysis’ is applicable only if the same is recommended at the Scoping stage.

J& K SIDCO.
CHAPTER -10
ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT PLAN
10.1 Introduction –
An EMP is a site-specific plan developed to ensure that all necessary measures are
identified and implemented in order to protect environment and comply with
environmental legislation and then being implemented with a primary objective to
minimize harm to the environment.
In Chapter 4 of this EIA report, anticipated impacts during construction and operation
phases of the proposed project have been identified, predicted and evaluated.
Conventionally most of the identified impacts can be managed through the proposed
effluent treatment and gaseous emission controls already described. However, where
potential sources of environmental impacts could not be managed through such measures,
additional mitigation measures are required.
This chapter on the Environmental Management Plan [EMP] lists and describes those
measures, they are either of an organization, procedural or technical / instrumental nature.
These measures are over and above all items already incorporated in the design of project
facilities.
The details provided by the proponent about the proposed project [technical data, policy
matters, approach to environmental protection, etc. ] and the baseline environmental
status monitored through field surveys during the study period have formed the basis to
predict the impact on all individual components of environment.
The impact identification and prediction has been made keeping in view the predicted
results primarily based on design details and the baseline data gathered during the study
period. The EMP relevant to construction and operation phases is delineated in the
following sections –
10.2 Objectives & Scope –

The aims of the Environment management Plan are –
 Overall conservation of environment

 Minimization of waste generation and pollution
 Judicious use of natural resources and water
 Safety, welfare and good health of the workforce and populace.
 Ensure effective operation of all control measures.
 Control measures against probable disasters and accidents.
 Monitoring of cumulative and long time impacts
 Ensure effective operation of all control measures.
10.3 The objectives of the Environment management Plan are –

The main objectives in formulating the environment management Plan are –
 To treat the effluent from the units of the Industrial Growth Centre, Lassipora to a level
so that the effluent can be recycled & reused in the industrial units, safely.
 To minimize the air emission, noise and hazardous waste with appropriate technology.
 To comply with all the regulations stipulated by MoEF & CC /Central/State Pollution
Control Boards related to effluents inlet and Outlet norms discharge standard and air
emission as per Water & Air pollution control laws.
 To encourage the member industries to carry out primary treatment of their effluent by
imposing the treatment charges based on pollution levels in the effluent sent to CETP.
 To handle hazardous waste as per Hazardous Waste (Management, Handling and Trans
boundary Movement) Amendment Rules, 2016 and amended thereof under
Environment (Protection) Act, 1986.
 To improve the overall environmental status and to improve methods of environment
management.
 To establish green belt/plantation/garden/lawn around the project area to improve the
aesthetics of the area.
 To create good occupational environment for the benefit of the employees to improve
their work efficiency. To take effective measures to curb the fire and accidental hazards
on the project site.
 To arrange regular medical health check-up of the employees and to provide the
medical aid to them.
 To conduct the skill up-gradation training programmes for the employees and for
conducting training about preventive measures and for on-site and off-site emergency
conditions
 To allocate the required funds for the effective environmental management
 Dissemination of technological solutions on commercial basis to interested parties.
 Continuous development and search for innovative technologies for better
environment.
10.4 Environmental Management Cell
In order to maintain the environmental quality within the standards, regular monitoring of
various environmental components is necessary. J&K SIDCO will have a full-fledged
Environmental Management Cell (EMC) reporting directly to Functional Head for
environmental monitoring and control. The EMC team will take care of pollution
monitoring aspects and implementation of control measures.
Responsibilities of Environment Management Cell –

The responsibilities of the EMC include the following:
 Regular environmental monitoring will be carried out to ensure that pollution is

limited below prescribed limits and to take corrective action by either optimizing the
treatment process or providing new equipment or improving the performance of
pollution control equipment. In case the monitored results of environment pollution
will indicate parameters exceeding the prescribed limits, remedial actions will be
taken through the concerned plant authorities.
 The actual operation and maintenance of pollution control equipments of each
department will be under respective department heads.
 To implement the environmental management plan
 To assure regulatory compliance with all relevant rules and regulations
 To ensure regular operation and maintenance of CETP.
 To minimize environmental impacts of operations as by strict adherence to the EMP
 To initiate the environmental monitoring as per approved schedule
 Review and interpretation of monitoring as per approved schedule and
corrective measures in case monitoring results are above the specified limits
 Maintain documents of good environmental practices and applicable
environmental laws as ready reference
 Maintain environmental related records
 Coordination with regulatory agencies, external consultants, monitoring laboratories.
 Specification and regulation of maintenance schedules for pollution
control equipment.
 Ensuring that standards are maintained.
 Developing the green belt.
 Ensuring water use is minimized by recycling.
 Organizing meetings of the Environmental Management Committee and reporting to
the Committee.
10.5 Management & Maintenance of Conveyance System –

Environment friendly and cost effective system of effluent conveyance has been
planned to bring the effluent from the units located in Industrial Growth Centre,
Lassipora.
Following are the special provisions made in conveyance system to protect the
environment from any malfunction and for smooth conductance.
 Effluent will be transported via pipeline system from each industry to CETP
after meeting the discharge standards to the pipeline (inlet to CETP).
 Proper Inspection will be carried out of the effluents received & discharged.
 Cleaning of pipeline will be carried out as per requirement.
 The routine monitoring of pipeline shall be carried out.
10.6 Management of Water Environment at CETP –
 Record of daily effluent received from each member unit and disposal of treated
effluent is maintained.
 Magnetic flow meters are installed each on pump discharge line of equalization tank
and on final disposal line of Treated Effluent Disposal Sump.
 Effective Waste water treatment in CETP is done by proper operations and controls in
order to meet the disposal norms.
 Regular maintenance of the plant will be carried out & care will be taken that the
generated leachate or any other waste water does not contaminate the ground water
of the area.
 The treated water will be recycled and reused for the horticulture & agricultural
purposes to have the eco-friendly system. Adequate Spares for effluent collection,
handling, treatment and transfer will be maintained.
10.7 Monitoring of Member Industrial Units for Their Responsibilities
 To record the quantity of the influent daily

 To record the stipulated quality parameters of the influent and treated effluent daily
 The daily record of the quality and quantity of the influent and treated effluent
will be maintained by each member industry and is submitted on daily basis to
CETP authorities.
 This will facilitate the smooth functioning of the treatment plant at CETP and to
calculate the share of charge of individual member industries on pollution loads
basis.
10.8 Green Belt Development

Tree plantation is one of the effective remedial measures to control the Air
pollution/dust emission and noise pollution. It also causes aesthetics and
climatologically improvement of area as well as sustains and supports the biosphere.

It is an established fact that trees and vegetation acts as a vast natural sink for the
gaseous as well as particulate air pollutants due to enormous surface area of leaves.
It also helps to attenuate the ambient noise level.
Plantation around the pollution sources control the air pollution by filtering the air
particulate and interacting with gaseous pollutant before it reaches to the ground.
Tree plantation also acts as buffer and absorber against accidental release of
pollutants.
Adequate green belt will be developed as per the CPCB norms.
The plants used for Green belt development should exhibit following characteristics
in order to be selected for plantation.
1. The species should be fast growing and providing optimum penetrability.
2. The species should be wind firm and deep rooted
3. The species should form a dense canopy.
4. As far as possible, the species will be locally available
5. Species tolerance to air pollutants like PM, SO2, and NOx should be preferred.
6. The species should be permeable to help create air turbulence and mixing within
the belt.
7. There should be no large gaps for the air to spill through.
8. Tree with high foliage density, leaves with larger leaf area and hairy on both the
surface.
9. Ability to withstand conditions like inundation and drought.
10. Soil improving plants (Nitrogen fixing, rapidly decomposable leaf litter).
11. Attractive appearance with good flowering and fruit bearing.
12. Bird and insect attracting tree spacing.
10.9 Odour Management Plan

Following control measure will be implemented to avoid the odor problem;
 All the aspects of odour control have been adopted during the designing of
the Treatment plants.
 Dilution of odorant (dilution can change the nature as well as strength of an odour)

 Neutralization can be done (certain pairs of odors in appropriate concentrations
may neutralize each other).
 Aerobic condition will be maintained in the proposed Biological Treatment System.
 Avoiding the overloading in process.
 Minimize turbulence in effluent flow.
 Minimize the sludge backlog.
 Continuous disposal of sludge.
 Proper maintenance of operating conditions in the CETP.
 Proper housekeeping will be done.
 Green belt will be developed.
 Use of Personnel Protective Equipments like; nose masks, goggles for individuals
working in the CETP area.
Occupational Environment –
 Provision of First Aid at Site
The proposed project may cause health problem to workers handling toxic effluent
discharged by various industrial units. To meet any emergency during, provision for First
Aid should be made available by the project proponent. Before the affected person is
removed to a doctor or health institution for necessary medical aid, the worker should be
provided with First Aid.
 Tie up with the Nearest PHC for Medical Help
To meet the medical needs of the workers it is suggested that tie-ups with nearest hospital
or Primary Health Center (PHC) may be made. Few beds may be exclusively reserved for
the CETP workers in the above health institutions. This will ensure timely medical aid to
the affected persons.
 Supply of Mask, Gloves and Helmets
The workers are subject to various diseases, including skin diseases. For protection from
toxic material it may be made compulsory for all workers in the plant to wear masks and
gloves while working in the CETP.
 Regular Health Checkups
The plant workers may be encouraged to undergo health checkups at regular intervals in
order to protect themselves from various diseases. The Health Department of Jammu &
Kashmir Government should organize Health Camps at regular intervals to make people
health conscious. Further, free medical facilities may be made available to the workers and
their family members.
10.10 Conclusion –
The operation of CETP will result in decreasing the pollution levels in this highly pollution
prone area and thereby protection and restoration of the ecology of the region.
The proposed project of CETP for treatment of effluents generated from units located in the
Industrial zone of Samba with recovery of water & reuse is recommendable as corporate
social responsibility of industries.
Treated wastewater from CETP will be used for horticulture & agricultural purpose. It is
proposed that the surplus treated water if any will be disposed off in the adjacent storm
water drain (Nalla), for which land stands acquired connecting up to Basantar river. The
social welfare activity of the M/s J&K SIDCO will improve the infrastructural facilities in the
surrounding villages especially with respect to education and medical field.
EIA for the upgradation and expansion of CETP of 600 KLD to 1100 KLD
capacity and implementation of SLF at Industrial Growth Centre, Lassipora,
District-Pulwama, J&K by M/s J& K SIDCO.
CHAPTER-11
SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION
11.1 PROJECT BACKGROUND
Industrial Estate project is proposed to be developed over an area of 313.27 acres (6193
Kanals) at Lassipora, Kashmir. In line with the development plan of the district, Jammu &
Kashmir State Industrial Development Corporation (J&K SIDCO) has acquired land for
developing a new Industrial Growth Centre at Lassipora, Kashmir, with modern and
environment-friendly infrastructure facilities.
Industrial Estates come under the schedule 7 (c) according to EIA notification 2006 & its
amendments. There are two categories under schedule 7 (c), category “A” & category “B”.
Category “A” project required clearance from MoEFCC while category “B” projects
required clearance from their respective Authorities (SEIAA). Industrial Estate project at
Lassipora, Kashmir comes under “B” category as the project area is less than the 500 ha.
Application form for Common Effluent Treatment Plants 7 (h) projects included Form 1 &
Pre Feasibility Report on the basis of which, TOR has been granted by State Level
Environment Impact Assessment Authority, Jammu & Kashmir vide letter no-113-
18/MS/SEIAA/JK/2010 on dated 12.01.2010. Based on the TOR, this report is the EIA
Report for EC presentation.
The EIA has been carried out by Idma Laboratories Ltd., a QCI/NABET accredited EIA
Consultancy organization having a MoEFCC and NABL Accredited Laboratory. For this
study, the impact zone will confine within an angular radius of 15 km from the project
boundary.
The EIA is conducted to establish the baseline environmental setting in the study area,
assessment of potential impacts on different environmental components, design of
mitigation measures so as to keep impacts within acceptable limits and strengthen the
positive impacts.
Page 264
capacity and implementation of SLF at Industrial Growth Centre,
Lassipora, District-Pulwama, J&K by M/s J& K SIDCO.
The Executive Summary summarizes the findings of the EIA study to aid in decision
making and provides project related information and environmental impacts to non-
technical sections of society. The summary highlights the baseline environmental status,
key environmental issues and their likely impacts and also lists the major recommended
mitigation measures to attenuate the impacts.
11.2 PROJECT SITE
The Industrial Estate project will be located in Lassipora, Kashmir. Geo-graphical

coordinates are 330 47’ 17.59’’ N and 740 56’ 55.16’’ E. The nearest airport to the site is
Srinagar International Airport which is 25.9 km away in NW direction and the nearest
railway station is Shri Mata Vaishno Devi Katra railway station about 93.6 km in South
direction. The site can be approached by NH-IA which lies at a distance of about 14 km in
East direction.
11.3 PROJECT FEATURES

Salient features of the project are:-
Table 11.1: Salient Features of the project
S.NO FACILITY VALUE
1. Power Demand
2. Source of Power Grid Power (Source-J&K EB
through the sub-station present
for the IGC)
3. D.G. Set In house
4. Solar Power Generation 0.5 MW Solar Power Plant
envisaged
5. Water Supply Source Tube wells
6. Total Water Demand Fresh water- 6.624 KLD
Treated water- 7.730 KLD
7. Wastewater generation 8.138 KLD
8. CETP Capacity 600KLD present and will be
expanded to 1100 KLD

9. Solid waste generation 39,470 kg/day
10. Manpower requirement 11051
11. Project cost 5420.50 Lacs
Land cost 362.40 Lacs
Development cost 5058.10 Lacs
12. Connectivity National Highway 1A (NH-1A) is
located at a distance of 14 km in
East direction
11.4 ENVIRONMENTAL SETTING OF THE STUDY AREA
The baseline environmental status was assessed based on primary and secondary data
collected either through in-site field observation or obtained from agencies such as
Irrigation Department, India Meteorological Department (IMD), Central Ground Water
Board, Geological Survey of India, State Ground Water Department, State Pollution
Control Board, Census of India and Local Forest Department, Non -Governmental
Agencies. The baseline status established from analysis of secondary and primary data
and predicted impacts are discussed below. The proposed mitigation measures are also
provided along with.
11.4.1 Land Environment
The land use pattern of the study area (15 km) is mainly residential, agricultural and
open scrub, open land, forest, vegetation & River with dry channel. The site falls under
Industrial use as per the development plan of Lassipora. When awarded by the project
proponent, the land was fallow land. Compensation has been given to the families for
resettlement and rehabilitation. The construction phase of any construction project poses
the threat of soil contamination and soil erosion, mainly during the construction phase.
Inadequate solid waste management & waste from industries may also cause soil
contamination during operation phase. The estimated waste generation during operation
phase will be 39,470 kg/day.
Page 266
During construction phase, excavation related work will be avoided during the monsoons
and site clearing will be carried out for specific areas being developed. All wastes from
site will be regularly removed and disposed/sold. An efficient solid waste management is
proposed comprising waste collection, segregation at sold waste management facility
within the site, and their disposal. Solid waste will be disposed by sale of recyclable
wastes to vendors, composting of bio-degradable wastes, land filling of inert wastes to
municipal dump sites and hazardous wastes to TSDF.
11.4.2 Water environment
The water requirement during construction phase will be met by private water tanker. A
combination of efficient water management to reduce water consumption, reuse of
treated wastewater to reduce freshwater demand and rainwater harvesting to replenish
groundwater is proposed to have a positive bearing on the water environment of the
region. A Common Effluent Treatment Plant of total capacity 600 KLD is under operation
for the treatment of waste water which will be further expanded to 1100 KLD.
11.4.3 Air Environment
During construction phase, the major air pollutant of prime concern is PM10 as impacts
of other emissions such as SO2, NO2, and CO will not be significant because the nature of
sources is such that the emissions are distributed spatially as well as temporal. Industrial
emissions will also be taking place during operation phase. The levels of PM10 are less
than the standards prescribed by NAAQS at all stations. Thus dust emissions from
construction activities shall require comprehensive mitigation measures and best
construction practices. Adequate stack heights will be proposed for D.G. Sets & for every
individual industry above the ground to provide for sufficient dispersion of pollutants.
Water sprinklers will be used to suppress dust during construction. During the operation
phase, green belt and green area development is proposed to restrict and absorb air
pollutants. Each industry will provide mitigation measure based on the type of industry.
Page 267
11.4.4 Noise Environment
Noise levels were observed at nine locations within the study area. Levels of background
noise monitored at project site exceeds the limits at 55 dB (A) during the daytime but is
within limit 45dB (A) at the night time respectively. The noise emitted from heavy-duty
construction equipments during construction period being high shall require
occupational preventive measures and temporary noise barriers for noise attenuation.
The construction period being about 4 to 5 year duration approx., will require significant
mitigation measures such as restricted loud noise activities to daytime, provision of PPEs
and acoustic enclosures for D.G. Set.
In the operation phase, noise pollution will be checked through acoustic enclosures of DG
Sets and green belt plantation. Noise will also be generated from different industries
which are going to be set up in industrial area. It will be the responsibility of each
industrial owner to provide suitable noise control measures (noise control
barriers/acoustic enclosures) within the industrial area.
11.4.5 Biological Environment
There is no protected area, reserved forest or sanctuary in the study area. The project will
have 175 acres of green area. The proposed landscaping will include native species that
will attract local birds and insects, reduce pollution and improve aesthetics and micro-
climate of the region.
11.4.6 Socio-Economic Environment
The population of the project site would include Residential, Industrial, Institutional and
floating population. The study area has access to clean drinking water and adequate
transportation facilities.
The project will add to the infrastructure facilities will also have a positive bearing on the
local economy by increased demand of daily needs items, increased business
opportunities in meeting fancy and recreational means for the population of the
Page 268
residents. It is also proposed to engage local people after imparting adequate training and
local companies for maintenance of the Industrial Estate during operation phase.
11.4.7 Energy Efficiency
For power requirement a 2x10 MVA receiving station is proposed to supply power in the
area. Various provisions are made to reduce the energy efficiency of the building such as
use of solar energy, provision of low energy fixtures, design features to maximize sunlight
and use of materials to improve energy efficiency.
11.4.8 Other
Resource Conservation: A concerted effort is made towards resource conservation by
way of using recycled building materials, fly-ash bricks, reduced water consumption and
improving energy efficiency of the building.
Indoor Air Quality: Special attention will be given to maintaining indoor air quality
through use of low VOC paints, provision of adequate ventilation, proper storage of
chemical and cleaning materials.
Safety: A network of manned security gates, security men, closed circuit TV and intercom
facilities are proposed to ensure safety of the occupant. The buildings will also be
provided with adequate fire tenders, fire alarms and water sprinklers.
11.5 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

Adequate environmental management measures will be incorporated during the entire
planning, construction and operating stages of the project to minimize any adverse
environmental impact and assure sustainable development of the area.
For the effective and consistent functioning of the campus, an Environmental
Management
System (EMS) will be established at the site including an Environmental Management cell
for implementation of the EMP and monitoring plan, training and awareness, audits and
maintenance of records. Based on the environmental assessment, the associated potential
Page 269
adverse environmental impacts can be mitigated to an acceptable level by adequate

implementation of the measures as stated in the EIA and the EMP. Some of the benefits
from the project are:-
 Use of solar energy by industries.
 Provision of green walls
 Use of fly ash bricks.
 Use of steel manufactured from recycled content
 Provide permeable paving to control surface water runoff
 Meet all requirements for buildings in moderate earthquake prone areas.
 Provision of fire alarms and water sprinklers
 Provision of welfare schemes to workers
 Extending educational and healthcare facilities to the local people
 Commitment to engaging local people and businessmen for maintenance and
repair work.
Hence, it may be concluded that the project will have significant positive economic and
social impact on the local community apart from meeting the housing needs of the
occupants, without bearing any significant adverse environmental impacts.
Page 270
Table 11.2: Summary Matrix Of Predicted Impacts And Mitigation Measures

S.No Environmental Potential Potential source Control through EMP & Impact Evaluation Remedial
Components Impacts of Impact Design Measures
1. Groundwater Ground water Construction Treated in the modular No significant impact Modular
Quality contamination Phase STP. as majority of STP will be used to
laborers would be manage waste
Wastewater locally deployed. water.
generated from
Labor tents.
1b. Operation Phase Sewage will be treated in No significant In an unlikely event

Common effluent negative impact on of soil and ground
Sewage treatment, Treatment Plant. Sludge ground water quality water
sludge disposal on will be disposed with envisaged. contamination,
land. municipal wastes. When all remediation
phases get completed measures shall be
biodegradable sludge implemented.
might use for biogas
generation.
2. Groundwater Ground Water Construction N. A No significant impact No use of ground

Quantity Depletion Phase on ground water water will be used
quantity envisaged. During construction
Private water phase.
tanker will supply
the water in
construction
phase.
Page 271
2b. Operation Phase Recycling of treated No significant impact Controlled

wastewater to reduce on ground water withdrawal from
Ground water freshwater requirement quantity envisaged. tube
augmented with well
tube wells supply Awareness Campaign for
during operation reduced water use by
phase. occupants.
3. Air Quality Dust Construction Dust suppression through Not significant Use of sprinklers
Emissions Phase water sprinkling using because dust will reduce dust
water trucks, handheld generation will be particles in the
All heavy sprays and automatic temporary and will atmosphere
construction sprinkler systems. settle fast due to dust
activities. suppression
techniques used.
Vehicles transporting loose
construction material
should be covered.
Contractors will be advised

to provide dust masks for
the employed labour.
Emissions of Construction Rapid on site Not significant Regular
PM, SO2, NO2 Phase construction Monitoring of
and CO emissions and
Operation of Improved maintenance of control measures to
Construction equipments. reduce the emission
equipment and levels.
vehicles during
site development.
Page 272
3b. Operation Phase Use of ultra-low Sulphur Not significant as

diesel, if available. D.G. Set would be
Power generation used as power
through D.G. Set Stacks will be provided of backup only.
Operation. adequate height.
Emissions from Green belt to be provided

vehicular traffic. With specified species to
help reduce PM levels.
Emission from
specific industries Based on the type of
process involved each
industry will provide
proper stack height for
emissions other than DG
set along with control
measures like electrostatic
precipitator and bag filters
4. Noise Noise Construction Equipments should be

Environment emissions Phase fitted with silencers, where
applicable and maintained
Operation of well.
construction
equipment and Providing noise shields
vehicles during near heavy construction
site development operations.
Construction activity will

be limited mostly to
daytime hours only.
Page 273
Use of Personal
Protective Equipment
(PPE) like earmuffs and
earplugs during
construction activities.
4b. Operation Phase Peripheral plantations. Not significant
Noise from Providing Acoustic

vehicular Enclosures on D.G. Sets. Short-term exposure
movement. within permissible
Acoustic enclosures will be limit.
Noise from D.G. provided, where ever
sets operation. possible to control noise.
Short-term exposure
From Industry during working
specific Along with acoustic hours
machineries enclosures ear muffs will
be provided for the
workers, working at high
noise generating areas.
5. Land Soil Construction Construction debris will be Impact will be local,
Environment contamination Phase collected and suitably used as any waste
on site as per construction Generated will be
Disposal of waste management plan. reused for
Construction construction
debris. activities.
Not significant.
5b. Operation Phase Solid waste from site will Not Significant
be collected on a daily.
Dumping of
Page 274
municipal solid The segregation, Negligible

waste on land. transportation and disposal impact
of wastes will be handled
Handling of used by a private agency.
oil from D.G. Sets.
Waste will be handled as
per The Hazardous Wastes
(Management & Handling)
Rules, 1989.
6. Biological Removal of Construction The site comprises of No negative
Environment Flora and Phase abandoned agriculture impact
(Flora and Fauna on site. land.
Fauna) Site development
During
construction
6b. Increase of Operation Phase Plantations of species that Beneficial
Green Cover are native to the area, fast impact
Plantations along growing and with good
the periphery of canopy cover.
the complex.
7. Socio - Population Construction Compensation has been No negative
Economic displacement Phase provided to the land Impact
Environment and economic owners by J&K SIDCO
impact Resettlement &
Rehabilitation is
involved. Employment for labourers
Construction
Activities Beneficial
impact
Page 275
7b. Operation Phase Project will provide Beneficial

Employment opportunities. impact
Site operation.
Boost to local market for
increased demand in goods
of daily need.
8. Traffic Pattern Increase of Construction Heavy vehicular movement No negative Adequate
Vehicular Phase will be restricted to impact Parking facility will
traffic daytime only and adequate be provided within
Heavy vehicular parking facility will be the site to regulate
movement during provided. heavy vehicular
construction movement.
Operation Phase Vehicular movement will Moderate Adequate
be regulated inside the negative parking
Increased traffic site impact facility will
from the project Adequate parking space be provided
provided. within the
site to
regulate vehicular
movement.
Page 276
CHAPTER -12
Disclosure of Consultant
Idma Laboratories Limited the group’s Flagship Company was incorporated in 1981.
It is a multidisciplinary center for excellence in testing and analysis including capacity
building.
Idma represents our corporate philosophy- Invest energy and ingenuity in programme
areas; develop knowledge networks for new insights through interaction of different
perspectives and approaches; manage resources in a sustainable manner and be
accountable.
IDMA Laboratories Ltd. is ISO-9001: 2008, 14001& 18000certified company.
EIA Division has been accredited with National Accreditation Board for Education &
Training (NABET) (Quality Council of India) vide Minutes of 47th AC meeting for
Surveillance assessment dated April 12, 2013.
IDMA Laboratories Ltd. has its own Environmental Laboratory at Plot No. 391,
Industrial Area, Phase I, Panchkula (Haryana) approved by the Ministry of
Environment & Forests, Govt. of India, New Delhi vide notification No.1150(E) dated
22.05.2012. The Environmental Laboratory is also approved by the National
Accreditation Board for Calibration and Testing Laboratories (NABL) vide
certificates no. T-0187 dated 25.05.2012 as ISO/IEC -17025: 2005 in chemical testing
and T-0188 for Mechanical testing. The laboratory also recognized by Bureau of
Indian Standards (BIS) vide Ref.No.CI/COAPD/OSL (9123236), dated 04 July, 2011.

List of Experts For EIA/EMP Report Preparation
EIA Coordinator Mr. Pradyumna Deshpande
Dr. Shalini Gupta
S. Functional Area Expert Name

No.
1. Hydrology, Ground Water & Water Conservation Mr. P. Radha Krishna

(HG) Moorthy
2. Water Pollution, Prevention, Control & Prediction of Dr. P.K. Aggarwal

Impacts (WP)
3. Noise & Vibration (NV) Mr. P.K. Nagori
4. Risk Assessment & Hazard Mgt.(RH) Mr. P.K. Nagori
5. Ecology & Biodiversity (EB) Dr. Parmod Kumar
6. Solid Waste & Hazardous Waste Management (SW) Mr. Ankush Aggarwal
7. Meteorology, Air Quality Modeling & Prediction Dr. Shalini Gupta

(AQ)
8. Air Pollution Prevention , Monitoring & Control Dr. Shalini Gupta

(AP)
9. Land Use (LU) Mr. P. Radha Krishna

Moorthy
10. Socio-Economy Mr. Puran Chand Joshi
11. Geology & Soil (GS) Mr. S.C. Sharma

12. Soil Conservation Mr. M.K. Dwivedi
13. Common Effluent Treatment Plant (CETP) Mr. Neeraj Verma
THE FOLLOWING TEAM MEMBERS WERE INVOLVED:

Project Name: EIA for the upgradation and expansion of CETP of 600 KLD to 1100
KLD capacity and implementation of SLF at Industrial Growth Centre, Lassipora,
District-Pulwama, J&K by M/s J& K SIDCO.
Name and address of the Idma Laboratories Ltd, ISO 9001:2008 Certified,
Consultant
391,Panchkula, Haryana OHSAS 18001:2007 Certified and
QCI-NABET Accredited.
Team involved in Mr. Neeraj Verma

preparation of EIA/EMP
report under the guidance
of approved Experts
Base line data Idma Laboratories Ltd, MoEF Recognized, PPCB & NABL
Accredited Laboratory.
391,Panchkula, Haryana

Convort 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Convort 2

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Convort 2

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FINAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

The UPGRADATION & EXPANSION OF CETP FROM

JAMMU & KASHMIR STATE INDUSTRIAL DEVELOPMENT

M/s IDMA LABORATORIES LIMITED

(Accredited Environmental Consultant Organization by QCI/NABET at Sr. No. 10 in the list of

Table no. Title Page no.

3.5 Location of Ambient Noise Quality Monitoring Stations 142

EIA Consultant – M/s Idma Laboratories Limited Page 1

1.2 About J&K SIDCO

Development of infrastructural facilities for medium/large scale industrial projects.

Table 1.1 – Details of Tanneries at IGC, Lassipora

# Name of the unit Land Current Status Personnel

7 M/s Mir Leather Tannery 3.00 - -do- 19

1.4 Project Location

740 56’ 55.16’’ E

Nearest railway station is Shri Mata Vaishno Devi

Srinagar International Airport is situated at a distance

Distance from - Nearest town is Pulwama located at a distance of 9.18

Seismicity - The project is located in seismic zone V.

1.7 Analysis of alternatives

2.2 Justification for the Project

EIA Consultant – M/s Idma Laboratories Limited Page 13

Leather industry in J &K

Livestock Livestock Slaughter Fallen Total

Note: Figures in bracket represent actual livestock census of 2012, published by

2.3 Project Cost

Total Project Cost : 18, 98, 82,957.17

i. New Bar Screen 3,18,500.00

ii. Raw Effluent flow meter 19,79,900.00

A. Collection & Conveyance System

3 Mechanical Bar Screen 21,90,215.00

4 Submersible mixer in eq. tank with distribution chamber 13,81,977.00

5 Poly Dosing System 2,98,720.40

6 Primary Clariflocculator in SS. 9,61,000.00

7 Modification in aeration tank’s mixing system 37,79,322.00

8 Tertiary treatment system 57,65,550.00

9 Effluent & Sludge Storage Tank’s Instrumentation 12,25,750.00

C. CETP- Additional Capacity

11 New Equalization tank with mechanism 43,07,166.00

12 Dosing System 41,48,181.60

13 Primary Clarifier 19,31,712.20

14 Aeration System for new module 2,37,18,370.10

15 Secondary Clarifier 54,08,038.00

16 Effluent & Sludge Collection Tank –II with Instrumentation 47,69,123.95

18 D.G Sets 18,31,576.00

19 Additional Laboratory instrument. 7,05,655.00

20 MCC & Control Room 30,57,369.00

21 New SLF* 3,25,04,569.00

22 0.5MW Solar power System 3,23,09,127.17

23 Electrical work for Both module 1,05,88,550.00

Administration& Technical Charges (3%+ 2%) 80,11,939.12

J & K State Entry Tax and other escalations @13.5% 2,16,32,235.63

Grand Total 18,98,82,957.17

The sources of finance are:

# Contribution Amount % of the

II. Government of India through 70%

Detailed Cost Estimate

S.NO Qty Description Rate Estimate

1 1 Mechanical Coarse Bar screen 1158927 1158927

1 2 Control grids for inlet channel 401419 802838